Toshiba Telephone IP 5000 Series User Manual

TOSHIBA  
Telecommunication Systems Division  
IP Telephone, Messaging and  
Call Manager User Guide  
Title Page  
June 2011  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge General End User Information  
FCC Requirements  
Means of Connection: The IPedge does not connect directly to the telephone network. All direct  
connections are made to a gateway. Please refer to the gateway manufacturer's documentation.  
Radio Frequency Interference  
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and  
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction manual, may cause interference to radio  
communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device  
pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a  
residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case, the user, at his/her own expense, will be  
required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.  
Underwriters Laboratory  
This system is listed with Underwriters Laboratory (UL). Secondary protection is required, on  
any wiring from any telephone that exits the building or is subject to lightning or other electrical  
surges, and on DID, OPS, and Tie lines. (Additional information is provided in the IPedge  
Install Manual.)  
301756  
I.T.E  
CP01, Issue 8, Part I Section 14.1  
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the  
equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as  
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department  
does not guarantee the Equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Repairs to Certified Equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier.  
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,  
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution  
may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities  
of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable  
method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not  
prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
CAUTION!  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should  
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.  
Important Notice — Music-On-Hold  
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of  
Composers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are  
transmitted through the music-on-hold feature of this telecommunication system. Toshiba America  
Information Systems, Inc., strongly recommends not using radio or television broadcasts and hereby  
disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.  
Hearing Aid Compatibility Notice: The FCC has established rules that require all installed business  
telephones be hearing aid compatible. This rule applies to all telephones regardless of the date of  
manufacture or installation. There are severe financial penalties which may be levied on the end-user for  
non-compliance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toshiba Telecommunication Systems Warranty and License Agreements  
www.telecom.toshiba.com/Telephone_Systems_Support/warranty.cfm  
WARRANTIES FOR NON-TOSHIBA BRANDED THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS  
A valuable element of Toshiba’s product strategy is to offer our customers a complete product portfolio. To  
provide this value to our customers at the most optimal prices, we offer both Toshiba-branded and third-  
party manufactured products that support our Toshiba IPedge product portfolio. Similar to other resellers of  
software, hardware and peripherals, these third-party manufactured products carry warranties independent  
of our Toshiba limited warranty provided with our Toshiba-branded products. Customers should note that  
third-party manufacturer warranties vary from product to product and are covered by the warranties  
provided through the original manufacturer and passed on intact to the purchaser by Toshiba. Customers  
should consult their product documentation for third-party warranty information specific to third-party  
products. More information may also be available in some cases from the manufacturer’s public website.  
While Toshiba offers a wide selection of software, hardware and peripheral products, we do not specifically  
test or guarantee that the third-party products we offer work under every configuration with any or all of the  
various models of the Toshiba IPedge. Toshiba does not endorse, warrant nor assume any liability in  
connection with such third party products or services. If you have questions about compatibility, we  
recommend and encourage you to contact the third-party software, hardware and peripheral product  
manufacturer directly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 3 – SoftIPT  
2
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 5 – Messaging Features  
IPedge UG 06/11  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 8 – Call Manager Basics  
4
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 11 – Buttons  
IPedge UG 06/11  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 14 – Using Microsoft Outlook  
6
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 16 – Web-based User Administration  
IPedge UG 06/11  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
This guide describes the Toshiba IP5000-series telephones and various other  
user operations for applications that are integrated with the IPedge system.  
Organization  
This guide is divided as follows:  
Chapter 1 – The Grand Tour is an overview of the telephones supported  
by the IPedge system.  
Chapter 2 – The Basics covers thebasic operations of the IP5000-series  
telephones  
Chapter 3 – SoftIPT describes the SoftIPT software client functions.  
Chapter 4 – Feature Operations covers the details about the IP5000-  
series telephone’s advanced features.  
Chapter 5 – Messaging Features contains user instructions for the basic  
Messaging features.  
Chapter 6 – Greetings has procedures for the Message Greeting  
functions.  
advanced messaging functions, such as Group Distributions, Adding and  
deleting members of groups lists, Setting up personal options and  
message notifications, Changing mailbox passwords, Personal Assistant,  
Follow me, etc.  
Chapter 8 – Call Manager Basics covers the basics of using Call  
Manager.  
Chapter 9 – Using Call Manager Features contains user instructions for  
call handling features for personal as well as ACD calls in Call Manager.  
Chapter 10 – Preferences covers the Preferences options in Call  
Manager.  
Chapter 11 – Buttons discusses the various buttons and options  
available in Call Manager and how to change, edit, etc.  
Chapter 12 – Actions defi nes the powerful actions that can used with  
Call Manager.  
Chapter 13 – Personal Call Handler covers the setting up of call  
handling rules and other personal call handling options.  
Chapter 14 – Using Microsoft Outlook provides user instructions for  
Microsoft Outlook integration using Call Manager.  
Companion applications available with Call Manager, such as, Contacts,  
History, ACD Viewer, Chat, Dialer, Buttons, and Web Browser.  
Web-based Enterprise Manger User administration tool.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Conventions  
Conventions  
Note  
Description  
Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within  
some tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered  
notes apply to specific items.  
Important!  
Calls attention to important instructions or information.  
Press to answer a call to the Extension Number. Each station can have  
multiple extension buttons. Incoming calls ring the extension button(s)  
from the top down. For example, station 10's extensions ring 10-1 first,  
then 10-2, 10-3, and 10-4. A station is considered busy when all  
extensions are being used.  
Extension  
Number  
Arial bold  
Courier  
“Type”  
Represents telephone buttons.  
Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display.  
Indicates entry of a string of text.  
Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press  
Enter.  
“Press”  
Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries  
without spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example:  
Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential  
entry. Example: # + 5.  
Plus (+)  
Tilde (~)  
Means “through.” Example: 350~640 Hz frequency range.  
Denotes a procedure.  
Denotes the step in a one-step procedure.  
Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the  
electronic version of this document (Library CD-ROM), cross-  
references appear in blue hypertext.  
See Figure 10  
Related  
Documents/Media  
Some documents listed below may appear in different versions on the Toshiba  
FYI site or in print. To find the most current version, check the version/date in the  
Publication Information on the back of the document’s title page. The following are  
related documents for IPedge systems.  
IPedge General Description  
IPedge Installation Manual  
IPedge Feature Description and Implementation  
IPedge IP5000-Series Telephone Quick Reference Card  
Important! This document may contain references to features that are for future implementation.  
10  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The Grand Tour  
1
The IP5000-series telephones connected to a Strata CIX telephone system,  
running Release 5.2 or higher software, include a selection of IP telephone  
models and matching IP add-on modules, as well as a 60 button DSS Console.  
See Table 1 for more details.  
Some IP5000 telephones offer a built-in gigabit ethernet switch allowing the  
telephone to autosense the network speed, 10/100/1000Mbps. The IP5522-SD,  
IP5622-SD and IP5631-SDL telephone models do not support 1000Mbps.  
Through dynamic soft key assignments, the LCD telephones provide easy access  
to frequently-used features by prompting specific tasks, providing Outside Line  
Identification, User Name/Number, Call Duration, Date/Time of Day displays, and  
Name and number displays of incoming callers.  
The full-duplex speakerphone on these telephones enables you to place and  
receive calls without lifting the handset.  
The LCD telephones with 10 and 20 buttons are available with LCD backlight.  
However, the IP5022-SD and IP5522-SD telephones do not have the backlight. To  
change the backlight settings, refer to Chapter –Feature Operations.  
Table 1 IP5000 Series Telephones  
Description  
Image  
10 Button IP Telephone:  
• 4 line LCD with back light option  
• Full duplex Speakerphone  
• Headset I/F  
• Ringing LED  
20 Button IP Telephone:  
• 4 line LCD with back light option  
• Full duplex Speakerphone  
• Headset I/F  
• Ringing LED  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
The Grand Tour  
Table 1 IP5000 Series Telephones (continued)  
Description  
Image  
20 Button with Electronic LCD Labels:  
• 9 line LCD with back light  
• Full duplex Speakerphone  
• Headset I/F  
• Ringing LED  
The IP5000-series telephone upgrade options include:  
Table 2  
IP5000 Series Add-on Modules  
Description  
Image  
10 Button ADM for IP5000-series  
• LCD programmable key strip with  
back light  
20 Button ADM for IP5000-series  
• Paper Key Strip  
60 Button DSS for IP5000-series  
• Paper Key Strip  
Note: IP5522-SD and IP5622-SD can not connect ADM/DSS.  
12  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
The Grand Tour  
IP5000-series  
Telephone  
Overview  
The illustration of the IP5000-series telephone shown below gives a general idea  
of the basic attributes found on most of these telephones. The positioning of the  
buttons varies per telephone model.  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
I
20 Programmable Feature Buttons 4-Line LCD Telephone  
Legend  
Status LED (message and ringing)  
B. LCD Display  
A
G. Speaker LED Button  
H. Volume Button  
I. Hold Button  
J. Microphone  
C. Softkeys  
D. Programmable Feature Buttons  
E. Message Waiting LED Button  
F. Microphone LED Button  
K. Tilt stand  
Fixed Buttons  
The fixed buttons on the dial pad help perform standard functions quickly and  
easily.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
The Grand Tour  
Layouts  
Fixed buttons are laid out differently on the IP5000-series telephones.  
9-line LCD Telephone  
10 and 20 Button 4-line LCD Telephones  
Fixed buttons are located on either side of the dial pad.  
The Fixed buttons are described below.  
Table 3  
Fixed Button Definitions  
Button  
Definitions  
Message (Msg): When Msg LED flashes, press Msg to call back the  
station or voice mail device that activated the LED. This is the tele-  
phone’s [PDN] message waiting button.  
Important!  
Red LED must be on in order for button to function.  
Microphone (Mic/Mute) button toggles between Mic and Mute. When  
Mic key is lit, Mute is disabled. When Mic is pressed again and light is  
off, Mute is enabled on the microphone in the telephone and the micro-  
phone in the handset.  
14  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
The Grand Tour  
Table 3  
Fixed Button Definitions (continued)  
Button  
Definitions  
Speaker: Press to toggle the speaker ON/OFF. When red Speaker LED  
is lit handsfree communications is supported.  
To start a handsfree conversation; press the Speaker button, this turns  
the red Speaker LED on. To terminate this call press the Speaker button  
again (Speaker LED off).  
During a handset conversation, press the Speaker button to start  
hands-free communications (red Speaker LED on). Press the Speaker  
button again to transfer the conversation back to the handset (Speaker  
LED off).  
Press and release the volume control bar to adjust volume levels.  
Shift Key: Purple button on the IP5131 telephone. Press Shift at any  
time to alternate between display of feature keys 1~10 and feature keys  
11~20.  
Web Browser Key: Blue button on the IP5131 telephone. Press this key  
to access the web.  
Navigation Key: Round button on the IP5131 telephone is a navigation  
key used for moving the cursor on html pages and in the programming  
screens. Center of the button is the “select” function. The arrows are  
used to scroll up, down, left or right.  
Spdial  
Redial  
Press Spdial and enter 3-digit Speed dial access code. Speed dial  
access codes must be setup before they can be accessed.  
Press Redial to dial the last telephone number called (internal or exter-  
nal).  
If you have Automatic Line Selection, lift the handset first.  
Cnf/Trn (Con-  
Press Cnf/Trn to add internal or external parties to a conference call  
ference/Trans- (up to 8 parties).  
fer)  
Press Cnf/Trn and enter a number to transfer a call to another party (on  
the CIX system).  
Hold  
Press Hold to place an internal or external call on hold.  
Press Hold Hold to place an internal or external call on Exclusive hold.  
If your telephone is programmed for Automatic Hold, existing calls are  
automatically placed on hold when you answer a call or make another  
call.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
IPedge  
The Grand Tour  
Programmable  
Feature Buttons  
Programmable Feature Buttons are  
programmed by the System  
Administrator and can be customized on  
a per user basis.  
10  
09  
08  
07  
06  
05  
04  
03  
02  
01  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
Note: Programmable Feature Buttons  
are numbered bottom to top, left  
to right (shown right).  
Programmable Feature Button  
Layout  
Key Strip  
The key strips on the IP5000-series telephones and add-on modules are  
either electronic (programmable) or paper (refer to Table 1 and Table 2).  
LCD  
9-Line LCD Display  
The LCD on the 9-Line LCD telephone (shown below) in idle state shows:  
Top to Bottom  
Line 1 or the top line of the LCD will display your user name (if programmed)  
and your extension number.  
Line 2 will show the Date and time.  
Line 3 will show information related to your telephone set: VM New/Saved  
messages, Call Forward, or if a certain feature is enabled on your telephone  
set.  
A plus sign + on the LCD indicates there is more data to display. Press NEXT  
to advance through the information.  
Lines 4~8 will indicate Programmable Feature Button labels. “Browser”on  
Line 9 will display the Soft Keys (See “Soft Keys” on page 1-18).  
Browser  
Note: This feature applies to the IP5131-SDL telephone.  
Toshiba’s IP5131-SDL with it’s large display screen also supports an HTML  
browser to allow navigation on the World Wide Web or a company’s intranet.  
The phone can have a homepage setup that allows navigation to begin just  
like a homepage in your internet browser.  
16  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
The Grand Tour  
Shift Button  
Blue Button – toggles in-  
between call processing  
screen and HTML  
toggles between  
Programmable  
Feature Buttons  
1~10 and 11~20.  
browser or programming.  
Navigation Button -  
See “Browser” on  
Page 10  
Web pages display basic HTML but do not support ASP or Flash. The 18 buttons  
that surround the screen can be used to highlight selections in the browser. The  
Navigation Button can be used to move the viewing window across the website;  
the center of the navigation button can be pressed to select a field that is  
highlighted.  
The browser allows navigation through various pages of content and is not static  
to just one site. Navigation is as easy as highlighting a link and selecting it to  
move to the next webpage. All IP5131-SDL telephones come with the browser  
enabled. In order to access the browser, press the blue button on the bottom  
right-hand side of the phone; this allows you to switch between your call  
processing screen and the browser window.  
4-Line LCD  
Display  
The LCD in it's idle state (shown  
right) displays:  
Line 1 or the top line of the LCD will  
display your user name (if  
programmed) and your extension  
number.  
Line 2 will show the Date and time.  
Line 3 will show information related to  
your telephone set: VM New/Saved  
IP5000 4-line LCD display in Idle Mode  
messages, Call Forward, or if a  
certain feature is enabled on your  
telephone set. A plus sign + on the LCD indicates there is more data to display.  
Press NEXT to advance through the information.  
Line 4 will display the soft keys available in idle state. Press DSPLY to switch  
from the Call Forward display to the User Name display.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
The Grand Tour  
Soft Keys  
Softkeys (SK1 - SK4) refer to  
the four buttons directly below  
the LCD screen (shown right).  
Soft Keys dynamically change  
their functions and label  
depending on the state of the  
telephone. The dynamic  
feature associated with the Soft  
Key is displayed on the bottom  
line of the LCD display directly  
above each Soft Key button.  
SK1  
SK2  
SK3  
SK4  
18  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Basics  
2
This chapter reviews the basic operations of the IP5000-series telephones. The  
instructions apply to all telephone models, except when noted otherwise.  
Customizing Your  
Telephone  
Volume Control  
To adjust the Handset Volume  
Press the Vol to increase volume and Vol to decrease volume during the  
call. When you hang up, the volume returns to the default setting.  
To adjust the speaker volume for internal/external calls and background  
music  
1. Press Spkr.  
2. Press an extension button - you hear dial tone.  
3. Press the Vol to increase volume and Vol to decrease volume. This  
volume setting applies to all calls until changed.  
To adjust Ring Tone, Hands free Answerback and Speaker Off-hook Call  
Announce  
Make sure the telephone is idle and the handset is on-hook. Press the Vol to  
increase volume and Vol to decrease volume. This adjusts volume for your  
telephone’s ring tone, Hands free Answerback and Speaker Off-hook Call  
Announce simultaneously.  
To adjust handset Beep Tone  
1. With the handset off-hook, dial the Beep Tone Adjustment Code #6101  
(default code). You hear beep tone.  
2. Press Vol or Vol to reach the desired level.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
The Basics  
LCD Contrast  
Available on backlit telephones and backlit add-on module.  
To adjust the LCD contrast on the backlit telephones  
1. Press and hold down the Mic button.  
2. Press and release Vol or Vol repeatedly.  
Note: Holding the Vol button does not continue to change the setting. The  
button must be pressed for each step of contrast change.  
To adjust the LCD contrast on the Add-on Module  
1. Press Hold+3+6+9 (simultaneously).  
2. Press Contrast + button to increase contrast.  
3. Press Contrast - button to decrease contrast.  
4. Lift the handset off-hook / on-hook to save settings.  
Note: Holding the softkey does not continue to change the setting. The  
softkey must be pressed for each step of contrast change  
Brightness Control  
Available on backlit telephones with 4-line LCD’s and backlit add-on module.  
To change the LCD back light brightness  
1. Press Hold+3+6+9 (simultaneously).  
2. Press Bright softkey to increase brightness.  
3. Press Dim softkey to decrease brightness.  
4. Lift the handset off-hook / on-hook to save the settings.  
Note: Use the BL BRIGHT and BL DIM buttons in steps 2 and 3 on the 10  
button LCD Add-on Module.  
To change the LCD backlight brightness for IP5131-SDL or  
IP5631-SDL  
1. Press Hold+3+6+9 (simultaneously).  
2. Press the Others softkey.  
3. Press the BL Bright softkey.  
4. Enter a value of 0~3 using the dialpad. (0 = dim; 3 = brightest)  
5. Press the Set softkey twice.  
20  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
The Basics  
Backlight On/Off  
Available on backlit telephones and backlit add-on module.  
To change Backlight Settings  
1. Press Hold+3+6+9 (simultaneously).  
2. Press the Mic button.  
3. Press Hold.  
4. Use table below to choose preferred settings.  
5. Press Hold Hold to save settings  
Table 4  
Button  
Backlight Settings  
Input  
Meaning  
1
2
3
Always Off  
Always On  
On-demand  
Backlight  
FB1  
FB2  
1~30  
Timer [ x10 seconds]  
Example: 1 = 10 seconds; 30 = 300 seconds.  
Note: FB1 is the lower left key, FB2 in the next up, FB3 is above FB2, and FB4  
is above FB3.  
Dial Pad and  
Button Beeps  
IP telephones can emit a “beep” whenever a dial pad or feature button is pressed.  
The “beeps” are On by default. Follow these steps to turn the “beeps” On or Off.  
1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously).  
2. Press 0.  
3. Press Hold.  
4. Press Programmable Feature Button 1 (FB1) to toggle On/Off.  
5. FB1, LED On: buttons beep.  
6. FB1, LED Off: buttons do not beep.  
7. Press Hold to set the option.  
8. You must also go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode.  
Speakerphone/  
Microphone  
Sensitivity  
When you are using the speakerphone, high ambient noise levels may cause the  
party you are talking with to be to cut off frequently. If this happens, follow these  
steps to lower the sensitivity of the microphone on a IP5000-series telephone. The  
default is normal sensitivity.  
Adjustment  
1. Press 3+6+9+Hold (simultaneously).  
2. Press 0.  
3. Press Hold.  
4. Press Programmable Feature Button 3 (FB3) to toggle On/Off.  
5. FB3, LED On: Lower sensitivity  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
The Basics  
6. FB3, LED Off: Normal sensitivity  
7. Press Hold to set the option.  
8. Go off-hook, then on-hook to exit the program mode.  
Telephone  
Terminology  
When making or receiving calls on your IP5000-series telephone you may  
experience one or more of the following call features depending on how your  
telephone is configured.  
Line – is synonymous with trunk which is the line that connects you to the  
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). Line can be:  
a button on your telephone set designated for outgoing calls  
your DN button followed by dialing 9.  
Automatic Line Selection (ALS) – ALS is engaged on outgoing calls.  
Lift the handset or press Spkr to hear dial tone, the steady green Line  
LED indicates ALS in enabled. The second line of the LCD will display the  
method of dialing available, followed by the digits dialed.  
Ringing Line Preference – Answer any incoming call by lifting the  
handset or pressing Spkr. There is no need to press the ringing line  
button to answer the call when ringing line preference is enabled.  
Tone First Signaling – Internal incoming calls only: telephone rings in  
standard ring tone, lift handset or press Spkr to answer call.  
Voice First Signaling – Internal incoming calls only: a long tone is heard,  
followed by the caller's voice, this will automatically engage the Spkr to  
allow for hands free communications. Lift the handset if desired (for  
privacy). When Voice First Signaling is enabled the telephone does not  
ring on internal incoming calls.  
Hot Dialing – Dial a telephone number from the dialpad, the telephone  
automatically selects a line, shown with a green LED, and turns on the  
Spkr and Mic LED's. When Hot Dialing is not turned on the handset  
should be lifted or Sprk should be pressed in order to make a call.  
22  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
The Basics  
Making a Call  
There are three ways to originate a call from the telephone:  
1. To make a call, lift the handset, then dial the number.  
Handset  
A line may be automatically selected or choose a line manually. Dial tone is heard  
through the handset. The Speaker and Microphone LEDs do not light.  
Digits display as they are dialed. Call progress tones (Ringback Tone, Busy Tone,  
etc.) are heard through the handset.  
2. When connected, continue using the handset or switch to speakerphone by  
holding down Spkr and placing the handset in the cradle.  
Spkr Button  
1. To make a call, press Spkr.  
A line may be selected automatically or choose a line manually. The extension or  
Line button lights (depending on system programming). Dial tone is heard  
through the speaker. The Speaker and Microphone LEDs light.  
2. Dial the number.  
Digits display as they are dialed. Call progress tones (Ringback Tone, Busy Tone,  
etc.) are heard through the speaker.  
When connected, continue using the speakerphone or lift the handset to continue  
the conversation.  
Hot Dialing  
1. To make a call using Hot Dialing, start dialing the number.  
The extension button, Spkr and Mic LEDs light. Digits display as they are dialed.  
Call progress tones (Ringback Tone, Busy Tone, etc.) are heard through the  
speaker.  
2. When connected, continue using the speakerphone or lift the handset to  
continue the conversation.  
Dial Directory  
Calls can be made by selecting a name from the alphabetical telephone directory.  
To access the Directory  
1. Press DIR soft key (shown  
right).  
TOM EDISON  
APR 05 WEDNESDAY  
NO.2004  
1:01PM  
Select Directory menu  
appears.  
The soft keys on the Select  
Directory are:  
DIR  
My = Personal Speed Dial Names  
EXTR = System Speed Dial  
Names  
4 Line LCD Display  
INTR = Directory Number Names  
Dial = Cancel directory, get dial tone.  
2. Choose the directory you wish to access and use the dial pad to enter the  
name.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
IPedge  
The Basics  
Notes:  
If a directory is not selected and a name is entered, all directories will be  
searched.  
To enter names from the dial pad, press the dial pad button associated  
with the letter to be entered. Press the button once for the first letter, twice  
for the second letter, etc. Left and Right Soft Keys are available to move  
the cursor.  
1. Press FIND to start the directory search.  
2. Press NEXT to move forward through the directory.  
3. Press BACK to move backwards through the directory.  
4. Press Call to connect to the directory entry selected.  
5. On the 9-line LCD Display, press the button next to the displayed name.  
See figure on following page.  
6. Press CNCL to quit the directory search.  
Press the key next to the displayed  
name to call that person.  
BOB L (PRI)  
BOB LAWVER  
BILL THOMAS  
ONE TOUCH  
PICKUP  
BRAD FERRIS  
BRAD FISHER  
BRIAN SMITH  
ONE TOUCH  
ONE TOUCH  
ONE TOUCH  
ONE TOUCH  
ONE TOUCH  
CFAC  
DND  
Ext. 4227  
NEXT  
BACK  
CNCL  
9 Line LCD Display - Dial by Name Screen  
24  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
The Basics  
Answering a Call  
There are several ways to answer a call:  
Handset  
When the telephone is programmed for Ringing Line Preference, pick up the  
handset and the telephone automatically answers the ringing line.  
... or press the button associated with the ringing line (flashing green LED).  
Speaker  
When the telephone is programmed for Ringing Line Preference, press Spkr and  
the ringing line is answered.  
... or press the button associated with the ringing line (flashing green LED). Once  
connected, continue using the speakerphone or lift the handset.  
Shift Button  
Available on a 9-line display telephone only.  
If the LCD screen is set to view Buttons 11~20 and a call comes in on Button 1 the  
phone will ring and Caller ID information will display on the top of the screen,  
press the “Shift” Button to view Buttons 1~10 and answer the call.  
Handsfree  
Answerback  
With speakerphone enabled, the telephone may be programmed for Handsfree  
Answerback. The called party hears a single long tone, followed by the caller’s  
voice. Begin hands free conversation. If Handsfree Answerback were not  
programmed, the called party could hear the calling party speak but would not be  
able to answer them without answering the call manually.  
Notes:  
The extension LED flashes green, the Microphone LED lights steady red and  
the Speaker LED flashes Red.  
In order to perform any additional functions with this call (like a transfer or  
hold) the call must be properly answered to gain full call control. Perform the  
same steps you normally would to answer a call: press the Spkr button, the  
flashing DN button or lift the handset.  
Handsfree MIC setting needs to be enabled by your System Administrator.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
IPedge  
The Basics  
On a Call  
While on a call you can perform the following:  
Switching Between  
Press Spkr and place the handset on-hook to switch from handset to  
Handset and  
speakerphone mode.  
Speakerphone  
Take the handset off-hook to switch from speakerphone to handset mode.  
Microphone (Mic/  
Mute) Button  
This button toggles between Mic and Mute. When Mic button is lit, handsfree  
communication is supported, when Mic is pressed again and light is off, Mute  
is enabled and mutes both the microphone and the handset.  
Hold  
To place a call on hold, press Hold. Your LCD shows the line on hold. The  
held Line’s LED flashes green while appearances of the line at other stations  
flash red.  
To return to the held call, press the flashing held Line button.  
If you do not return to the held call within a specified time, it rings back to  
your telephone. The call remains camped-on to your station.  
If the held party hangs up, the call is released.  
See the Call Pickup section to pick up a call on hold from another  
extension.  
Exclusive Hold  
Automatic Hold  
This feature enables you to place a call on hold so that only you can retrieve  
it.  
While on a call, press Hold twice. That line’s LED flashes green while  
appearances of the line at other stations are steady red (in use).  
This features enables you to move from one Line button to another Line  
button without pressing Hold.  
Check with your System Administrator to make sure this setting is turned on.  
If Automatic Hold is not enabled, calls will drop when moving from one line to  
another without pressing Hold.  
While on a call, press another extension button to receive/originate a new  
call. The accessed line’s LED flashes (in-use). The first call is put on hold and  
your extension’s LED flashes.  
Consultation Hold  
1. While on a call, press Cnf/Trn. The call goes on hold.  
2. Dial another line.  
3. Transfer the call or return to the held call by pressing its Line button.  
26  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
IPedge  
The Basics  
Message Waiting  
Use your Msg LED/button and LCD to see/retrieve message(s).  
An extension can receive up to four simultaneous Message Waiting indications  
and LCD messages. One message is reserved for the Message Center.  
Your telephone can be programmed to have up to four additional (flexible)  
Message Waiting buttons/LEDs. Check with your System Administrator to see if  
these buttons have been programmed on your telephone. If so, substitute them  
when the Msg button/LED is mentioned in the following steps.  
Responding to a  
Lit Msg LED  
1. On an LCD telephone, if you see a “+,” press SK3 to display additional  
messages; otherwise, go to Step 2. The “+” indicates additional messages.  
The LCD can show up to three station messages for your extension and three  
for each additional (phantom) extension that you may have.  
2. Press Msg, then lift the handset. Your telephone rings the extension or voice  
mail device that sent the indication. The LED continues to flash red.  
3. After answering the message(s), place the handset back on-hook.  
4. If the Msg LED continues to flash, you have more messages; repeat Steps  
1~3 above to retrieve them. Voice mail devices turn off the LED/LCD  
indications after a short delay, after you checked all messages.  
5. To manually turn off your Msg LED, press your extension button, then press  
#409. Do this step for each message received.  
Turning On/Off  
MW LED on  
Another  
If you call an extension and it’s busy or there is no answer, you may be able to  
light that extension’s Message Waiting LED and enable that extension to call you  
back. The ability to perform this feature is set in system programming.  
Extension  
1. Dial an internal extension. You hear busy tone or there’s no answer.  
2. Press Msg or 7. The Msg LED flashes red on the called telephone. At your  
telephone, the Msg LED lights steady red and the LCD shows the station  
number where you set a Message Waiting light. Example: “MW SET TO  
3620.”  
3. If you decide to cancel the Message Waiting light at this point, press Msg or 7  
again while ring-over tone is playing and the light will be cancelled.  
4. Press Spkr. Your Msg LED turns Off. The Msg LED on the called telephone  
flashes until the called party presses the flashing Msg button which calls you  
back.  
5. To turn Off a Message LED that you have set on another extension, press  
#64 plus the extension number that has the message light set. Then press  
Spkr or hang up to release your telephone. Your LCD shows the extension  
and “MW CANCEL.”  
...or dial the extension that you set the Message LED on, then press  
77. Then press Spkr or hang up to release your telephone.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
The Basics  
LED Indicator Details  
Each line and Programmable Feature Button has a LED next to it  
which indicates the status of the line or feature associated with the  
button. Line LEDs light red or green and flash at varying rates to  
indicate call status (see Table 5).  
Table 5  
LED  
LED Indicators  
Your Station (Green)  
Interval Rates  
Other Station (Red)  
2 seconds On, 1/8 second Off  
— 1/8 second On/Off  
steady  
Extension In-Use  
(access outside line)  
1 second on at 10 pulses/sec-  
ond —1 second Off  
one second On/Off  
Incoming Call  
(while ringing)  
4 pulses/second for 1/8 second 1/2 second On/Off  
On/Off  
Hold (outside line) If using Pooled Line  
Grp, the hold indication is only at the  
station that places the call on hold.  
10 pulses/second  
steady  
Hold – Consultation  
(during consultation/transfer to another  
station)  
10 pulses/second  
steady  
flashes  
Hold – Exclusive (outside line)  
1 second at 2 pulses/second,  
1 second at 10 pulses/second  
Hold – Recall  
(when held call recalls your idle station)  
1 second at 2 pulses/second,  
1 second at 10 pulses/second  
steady  
Hold – Exclusive Recall  
Your extension button flashes  
10 pulses/second—1 second  
Off  
[SDN] red flashing or  
green ringing  
Internal Call  
(while station ringing)  
4 pulses/second, 1/8 second  
On/Off  
3/4 second on, 1/8 sec-  
ond Off  
Busy Station Transfer  
(outside call transferred to your busy  
station from a designated station or AA)  
10 pulses/second  
10 pulses/second  
2 pulses/second  
steady  
After disconnecting first call...  
Conference  
Note: LEDs on the telephone flash at different speeds depending on the  
function performed. Flash rates can be found under “LED Indicator  
28  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SoftIPT  
3
The SoftIPT is a software phone client that runs on appropriately equipped wired  
®
or wireless laptops, tablets and desktop PCs with all versions of Microsoft  
TM  
Windows 7, Windows Vista and Microsoft® Windows XP® operating software  
(OS).  
SoftIPT on a PC integrates the power of the PC with most of the features available  
on an IP5000-series telephone. You can use most of the features described in this  
User Guide. .  
Important! The SoftIPT functions in the same manner as a desktop IP  
telephone. Use this manual as a guide to the SoftIPT  
functions.  
SoftIPT Icons  
The special buttons relating to the SoftIPT screen are described below.  
Table 6: SoftIPT Button Definitions  
Button  
Definitions  
SoftIPT Directory – Clicking this icon enables you to access the  
directory you create using MS Outlook. Refer to “Using the Directory” on  
SoftIPT Configurations – Double click this icon to open the  
Configuration window. This enables you to view and change SoftIPT  
settings.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
SoftIPT  
Table 6: SoftIPT Button Definitions (continued)  
Button  
Definitions  
Audio Settings – Click this button to adjust the audio properties when  
connected to a USB handset.  
Help – Clicking this icon enables you to access Help as a user or find  
information on Setting Audio Properties, etc. Click Help to view all  
SoftIPT information.  
Shift Button (Purple) – Press Shift at any time to alternate between  
display of feature keys 1~10 and feature keys 11~20.  
Fixed Buttons  
The fixed buttons on your telephone enable you to perform standard functions  
quickly and easily. These buttons are described in Chapter –The Basics.  
Flexible Buttons  
All Flexible Buttons must be programmed for your telephone in system  
programming and vary for individual telephones. If a button does not appear  
on your display or telephone keystrip label, see your System Administrator for  
button assignments.  
Line Buttons  
You may have buttons designated as Line and/or Pooled Line Grp which  
enable you to directly access outside lines. Pooled Line Grp enables you  
to access available CO Lines from a group of lines appearing under one  
button.  
Liquid Crystal  
Display  
The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the SoftIPT will display information  
similar to the large 9-line IP telephone display:  
Desk Clock and Calendar in idle mode  
Call Duration during an outside call  
Operational, Advisory, and Notification messages  
LCD Control Buttons  
There are two types of LCD button functions: LCD Control Buttons and Soft  
Keys.  
When the Soft Key prompts appear on the LCD, the LCD Control Button just  
below the prompt offers access to that feature. See “Soft Keys” on page 11 for  
more information.  
SK1 is generally used as a Soft Key.  
Pressing SK2 switches you from the Call Forward (CF) display to the  
User Name display.  
Pressing SK3 advances you through information.  
30  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
IPedge  
SoftIPT  
Configuring  
SoftIPT  
Configure the  
SoftIPT  
1. After you have installed SoftIPT, double-click the SoftIPT icon on the desktop.  
The SoftIPT Configuration window opens.  
Important! See the illustration below. You will need to enter items A-E  
to configure SoftIPT. Check with your Telephone System  
Administrator to make sure that you have this  
information. After entering this information, print the  
screen for future reference.  
Figure 1  
SoftIPT Configurations  
2. In the SoftIPT Configuration window, enter the following:  
Fields  
Phone No.  
Description  
This is the SoftIPT extension.  
Password for IP user mobility  
By default, leave blank.  
Password  
Node  
Outgoing prefix  
When a call is made using the SoftIPT directory, SoftIPT  
automatically attaches the outgoing prefix for local calls, or long-  
distance prefix for long-distance calls, respectively. See “Using the  
Long distance prefix  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
SoftIPT  
Fields  
Description  
SoftIPT tries to connect to the IPedge using the following  
addresses:  
Primary IPedge server IP address  
Secondary IPedge server IP address.  
Notes  
If Broadcast is selected, SoftIPT tries to search for the IP address  
by sending broadcast messages. SoftIPT skips the Primary IP  
address or the Secondary one if it is not set. In either case, if  
SoftIPT successfully connects, the IP address is shown in the  
“Connected IP Address” field. See your System Administrator for  
IP address of the IPedge system.  
IP address  
If Broadcast is selected, the broadcast message is sent on the  
same subnet, which means SoftIPT can connect to the IPedge on  
the same subnet using Broadcast mode without designating the  
IPedge IP address. However, in some PC environments, SoftIPT  
cannot complete this broadcast registration sequence because  
the lower network module does not notify SoftIPT, through  
Windows, of receiving a reply message after sending a broadcast  
message. Therefore, Toshiba recommends using Manual mode if  
SoftIPT cannot find the IPedge by Broadcast.  
Network  
If there are multiple network adapters, select the one for SoftIPT.  
Check this box to automatically startup SoftIPT after starting your  
PC.  
Note If Automatic startup is unchecked and SoftIPT continues  
to start up, use the MSCONFIG utility screen > Startup tab  
and uncheck Toshiba SoftIPT. Consult your System  
Administrator on using the MSCONFIG utility.  
Automatic startup  
Popup window  
The SoftIPT window pops up when receiving a call.  
As shown below in Using the Directory, SoftIPT can use MS  
Outlook (not Outlook Express) as its directory. If multiple Outlook  
profiles are set, you can select one of the profiles when launching  
SoftIPT if this box is unchecked. See To check how many Outlook  
Use Default  
Microsoft Outlook  
Profile  
If you have only one profile, select “Always use this profile” and  
check the “Use Default Microsoft Outlook Profile” box. If you have  
several profiles and choose one of them, select “Prompt for a  
profile to be used” (see Figure on page 34), and uncheck the “Use  
Default Microsoft Outlook Profile” box (See Figure ).  
If you uncheck this box, you can input an extension number every  
time you log in. See “IP User Mobility” in the CIX General  
Description and Programming Manual, Volume 1 for details.  
Auto-Login on start-  
up  
32  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
SoftIPT  
Fields  
Description  
This option dictates what happens when you press the close (X)  
button in the upper right corner of the SoftIPT main window.  
Run in the background if this box is checked.  
Exit SoftIPT software if this box is unchecked.  
Allow SoftIPT to run  
in the background  
Note If the SoftIPT icon is still on the system tray at the bottom  
right corner of the PC, then SoftIPT is still running in the  
background, even after pressing the Close (x) button.  
3. Click OK.  
To check how many Outlook profiles are on your PC  
1. Go to Start > Control Panel > Mail  
2. Double-click the Mail icon  
3. Click the Show Profiles... button  
4. Here are all the profiles setup on your PC (see Figure on page 34)  
Figure 2  
Mail Setup - Outlook  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
SoftIPT  
Figure 3  
Mail Profiles  
Basic SoftIPT  
Functions  
Start the SoftIPT  
Double-click the SoftIPT icon on your desktop.  
Making a Call  
To make a call  
1. Click Speaker then select the on-screen dial pad buttons to dial a call.  
2. When connected to a call, you can select any of the call buttons, such as  
Redial, Hold or Conf.  
3. Click Speaker to end the call.  
Note: Do not use BGM (#490) on the SoftIPT. It conflicts with incoming calls.  
To make a Call using a USB Handset  
To install a USB handset, refer to the vendor's documentation and/or website.  
1. Go off-hook (pick up the receiver or press the hookswitch button on the USB  
Handset) to get dial tone.  
2. Dial the phone number - click the on-screen dial pad buttons, input numbers  
(asterisk key, pound key) from PC keyboard, or use the key pad on the USB  
handset, if available.  
3. To end the call, go on-hook (put down the receiver or press the hookswitch  
button).  
34  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
SoftIPT  
Answering a Call  
To answer a call using the Shift button  
If the LCD screen is set to view keys 11~20 and a call comes in on key  
1, the phone will ring and Caller ID information displays on the top of  
the screen - press the Shift key to view keys 1~10 and answer the call.  
Switching a Call  
to Your Headset  
You can switch a call from your IP telephone to the SoftIPT by placing the call on  
Hold and using the Call Pickup feature.  
1. Press Hold.  
2. On the SoftIPT, dial #5#72 + the extension number of your telephone.  
Note: You can also add this dialing string to a flexible button on your SoftIPT  
phone as a One-touch Speed Dial button for ease of call switching.  
Labeling Feature  
Buttons  
SoftIPT Version 3.0 provides soft labels preset by the Strata CIX system. If you  
wish to change them, contact your system administrator.  
Using the  
Directory  
You can create a directory with MS Outlook (not Outlook Express).  
1. Close SoftIPT if you are using it.  
2. Open MS Outlook.  
3. Double click on the Contacts icon, click on the New contact icon.  
4. Type in the contact information, click Save and Close. Add as many entries as  
desired. To edit an entry, double click on the name to open.  
5. Start Soft Phone.  
6. Click Directory icon. The directory displays (see below).  
7. Click on the name. The SoftIPT calls the contact.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
IPedge  
SoftIPT  
Using Echo Canceller  
If you have a headset plugged into the microphone/speaker jack of the PC,  
you do not have to always enable echo canceller. We recommend you to  
enable echo canceller in the event you want to use the PC's embedded  
microphone/speaker as a speakerphone device and not attach a headset to  
the microphone/speaker jack of the PC. If the PC does not have an  
embedded microphone even if it has embedded speaker, you do not have to  
enable echo canceller because a headset would be plugged into the  
microphone/speaker jack, see figure below.  
To use Echo Canceller, click the Audio Setting of SoftIPT and check the Using  
Echo Canceller box as shown below.  
Enabling Echo Canceller  
36  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature Operations  
4
This chapter gives you more details about your IP5000-series telephone’s  
advanced functions. An alphabetical list of supported features has been compiled  
in this chapter for fast and easy reference.  
Account Codes  
Account Codes (Forced or Voluntary) can be used for a variety of reasons  
including billing, tracking, and line restriction applications. Account Codes are  
assigned in the system as a fixed length (default is six digits) and are recorded by  
the system, along with the details of the calls, which can be printed on a Station  
Message Detail Recording (SMDR) report.  
Verified/Non-Verified  
Account Codes  
Verified Account Codes ensure that the system checks the account code you  
entered against a list created by the System Administrator. If the code is not in the  
list, the call will not go through.  
Non-Verified Account Codes must be a uniform length but any digits are accepted.  
Account Codes and Lengths are set up and managed by the System  
Administrator.  
Forced Account  
Codes  
Some applications require you to enter an Account Code. These Forced Account  
Codes may be verified or non-verified, depending upon the application, but in  
either case the caller must enter a code before proceeding.  
Dial using Forced  
Account Codes  
1. Place a call using the normal method.  
If the call requires an Account Code, a burst of tone (Entry Tone) is heard (after  
dialing the telephone number) alerting you to enter the Account Code.  
2. Enter the account number.  
When the number of digits designated for account codes has been entered, the  
number is checked against the verified list, if chosen, and the call continues  
normal. If the number of digits entered for the account code is not reached or the  
verified code does not match, then re-order tone is heard and the call is rejected.  
You can bypass Forced Account Code requirements with three emergency  
numbers, including 911. See your System Administrator for these numbers:  
1) 911  
2)  
_______ 3)  
_______  
Voluntary Account  
Codes (Verified/Non-  
Verified)  
Voluntary Account Codes are optional. They can be entered during a call and are  
used for tracking selected calls using Station Message Detail Report (SMDR) call  
detail recording option.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
If the system is set for Verified Account Codes, station users must enter a  
specific code when entering the Voluntary Account Code(s) or the code is not  
validated for the SMDR call report. This does not affect the call.  
Voluntary Account  
There are two ways to dial using a Voluntary Account Code:  
Codes  
Using the Account Code  
Button  
Note: This requires a Programmable Feature Button to be programmed on  
your telephone set with the Account Code feature access code (#46).  
1. After accessing a Group Central Office (GCO) line, press the Account  
Code button. LCD telephones prompt you to “ENTER ACCOUNT CODE  
NOW.”  
2. Enter the account code digits. The LCD prompt disappears upon entry of  
the first account code digit. After the account code is entered, the time  
indicator is restored to the LCD.  
3. If your station is set for Verified Account Codes, you hear a confirmation  
tone when the code is valid. If the code is invalid, you hear two short  
tones.  
4. Enter the Account Code. Your conversation is not interrupted.  
Using Access Codes  
Note: It’s a good idea to warn the other party that you will be disconnected  
momentarily when you enter the access code. Once the code is  
entered, you will be connected again.  
1. After accessing a GCO line, press Cnf/Trn. Once you press Cnf/Trn,  
your call is interrupted; you and the other party cannot hear each other.  
You will hear feature dial tone.  
2. Dial #46. LCD telephones prompt you to “ENTER ACCOUNT CODE  
NOW.”  
3. Enter the account code digits. The prompt disappears upon entry of the  
first account code digit. After the account code is entered, the connection  
is restored and the LCD shows the time.  
38  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Advisory Message  
Advisory messaging enables you to store a message for IP5000-series  
telephones with a display that call your telephone. The messages can be up to 16  
characters long. The IPedge Net system provides a number of predefined  
messages, shown in the table below. Message numbers 5~9 can be defined by  
your System Administrator.  
Advisory Message Default Code Table  
Msg No.  
Characters Displayed  
OUT TO LUNCH  
Additional Digits  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IN A MEETING  
CALL _____________  
BACK AT __________  
RETURN ON________  
Directory Number (e.g.,220)  
Time (e.g., 1030)  
Date (e.g., 10 20)  
Advisory Messages can only be set using the IP5000-series telephone. The  
preset advisory messages can be displayed using therWeb-bassed  
Administration application.  
Set Advisory Message  
1. Go off-hook or press your extension button to hear the dial tone.  
2. Press #411  
3. Enter Message number (see table above)  
4. Enter additional digits if required.  
5. Go on-hook or press Spkr to release the line.  
Clear Registered  
Message  
1. Go off-hook or press your extension button to hear the dial tone.  
2. Press #412.  
3. Go on-hook or press Spkr to release the line.  
Display Preset  
1. Login to your Web-Based Administration application..  
Advisory Messages  
2. Select System Info then the Advisory Message tab.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Alarm Notification  
The Alarm Notification Button must be set up by your System Administrator  
on your station.  
When the Alarm Notification button displays  
Call your System Administrator.  
This button stops displaying when the alarm clears or when you press the  
flashing button. If the alarm has not been cleared the Alarm Notification  
Button flashes every 10 minutes.  
Automatic Callback  
When you reach a busy station, you can set Automatic Callback to have the  
system monitor the busy extension and notify you when it becomes idle.  
Automatic Callback can place you in queue for an available outside line, if you  
reach a line group in which all lines are busy. When a station or line becomes  
available, the system rings your telephone; when you answer the system  
automatically rings the intended destination. The amount of time the system  
will wait for an idle destination is set in system programming. Automatic  
Callback is also known as “CO Line Queuing.”  
Set Automatic Callback  
1. If you hear a busy tone after dialing an outside line access code or a  
station number, press Auto Callback or 4. Busy tone stops, followed by  
success tone, then busy tone resumes.  
2. Hang up. You can make other calls while waiting.  
3. When the called station or outside line becomes idle, your telephone rings  
and you will see a fast flashing LED.  
If you called a busy station, the extension LED flashes green  
(incoming call) and the called number displays.  
If you called a busy outside line, the extension LED flashes green  
(incoming call rate). The seized line’s number displays.  
4. Answer within about three rings (can be programmed to ring up to three  
minutes) to prevent the callback from being cancelled. After you answer,  
you hear ring back tone, and the LED flashes green (in-use).  
If you hear a busy tone after answering a callback, the called party is already  
on another call or the line has already been seized or has received an  
incoming call. Your request is not cancelled. You will be called again the next  
time a line becomes idle.  
If you were attempting to make an outside call, the telephone number is  
automatically dialed, including the account code or override codes that were  
used.  
Cancel Automatic  
Callback  
Press Auto Callback or extension button + #431.  
Deactivate Automatic  
Callback  
To deactivate Automatic Callback, press the ACB button while its lamp is lit.  
When a predetermined time (overall timer) passes after Automatic Callback is  
activated, the system automatically cancels Automatic Callback. If the  
activator does not answer Automatic Callback for a predetermined time,  
Automatic Callback is automatically canceled. In either case, when Automatic  
Callback is completed or canceled, the ACB lamp button turns off.  
40  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Background Music  
(BGM)  
You can set background music over your telephone speaker. At least one  
music source must be connected to your system. Up to 16 different music  
sources can be applied to the IPedge Net system: the first source is Quiet  
Tone, all others can be music or recorded information. If media resources are  
exhausted, the user will temporarily be unable to hear BGM.  
Enable Background Music  
on your Telephone  
Speaker  
Press BGM. LED turns on. Or,  
Press an extension button + #490 + n + #, where n is the music source 1~15.  
Cancel Background Music  
on your Telephone  
Speaker  
Press BGM. LED turns off. Or,  
Press an extension button + #491.  
Adjust Volume  
The phone is in an idle state when listening to BGM. Attempting to adjust the  
BGM volume at this point will result in only a ringer tone adjustment and the  
BGM will restart at the beginning of the music source.  
BGM volume can only be adjusted when the phone is in use. The ‘in use’  
state is when a call is being received or dialed.  
To change the volume of the BGM, press the PDN key, this interrupts the  
BGM and initiates the ‘in use’ state. When you hear the dial tone, use the Vol  
key to adjust the tone up or down. Press the PDN key again to return to the  
BGM in progress.  
Call Forward  
There are two types of Call Forwarding that you can set. One is System Call  
Forward (set in System Programming) which automatically directs calls to a  
predefined location, such as Voice Mail. See your System Administrator to  
determine or change your System Call Forward destination.  
The other type is Station Call Forwarding. You can use Station Call  
Forwarding to replace your System Call Forward destination with a custom  
Call Forward setting made from your station. However, a Voice-first call will  
not be forwarded.  
Important! Check with your System Administrator to determine if  
the system uses Basic Survivability, if yes, do not  
change your station call forward settings.  
System Call Forward  
System Call Forward directs calls to a destination preset by an Administrator  
for each telephone, commonly set to voice mail.  
To turn on System Call Forward for your telephone, press #620.  
Confirmation tone (three short tones) and display shows “DATA  
PROGRAMMED.” This indicates the data is set.  
To turn off System Call Forward for your telephone, press #621.  
Confirmation tone (three short tones) and display shows “DATA  
PROGRAMMED.” This indicates the data is set.  
Station Call Forward  
Station Call Forward enables you to assign Call Forward destinations for each  
extension on your telephone to override the telephone’s System Call Forward  
settings. Each extension can be independently set up to Station Call Forward  
to a unique destination. You can set a Programmable Feature Button to  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
perform any Call Forward function using Enterprise Manager, Web-based  
User Administration tool. Call Forward must be set prior to receiving the call.  
Important! Check with your System Administrator to determine if  
the system uses Basic Survivability, if yes, do not  
change your station call forward settings.  
The following calls to your station can be forwarded:  
Internal calls  
Auto Attendant calls  
Outside lines that ring only your station  
Transferred internal or incoming line calls  
Station Call Forward  
You can set Call Forward for the following categories of calls. Within these  
categories, you can use five different types of Call Forward Settings (as  
detailed in the next section).  
Categories  
Call Forward Any Call – Forwards any call, whether an internal call or  
incoming line call.  
Call Forward - Incoming Line – Forward incoming line calls only.  
Call Forward Any Call - Set for Another Station – Enables you to set  
forwarding of all calls for another telephone within your telephone system.  
Call Forward - Incoming Line Set for Another Station– Enables you  
to set forwarding of incoming line calls for another telephone within your  
telephone system.  
Notes:  
Call Forward Any Call and Call Forward-Incoming line can be set  
simultaneously on a telephone. This allows incoming line calls to be  
forwarded to a different destination than all of the other types of calls.  
Call Forward destinations can be set to internal destinations or an  
outside telephone number.  
Call Forward Settings  
Call Forward All Calls – Forwards all calls immediately.  
Call Forward Busy/Do Not Disturb – Forwards calls immediately when  
your extension is busy or in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode.  
In Tone-first systems with multiple lines, Call Forward Busy forwards calls  
only when all line appearances are in use. In Voice-first systems, Call  
Forward Busy forwards all calls any time your telephone is in use.  
Call Forward - No Answer – Forwards unanswered calls after a preset  
number of rings. The preset number of rings can be set on a per user  
basis.  
Call Forward Busy/Do Not Disturb/No Answer – Forwards all calls  
when you are busy, in DND mode or when you don't answer a call within  
a preset number of rings.  
Call Forward Cancel – Cancels the set Call Forward feature. Notice that  
each category of Call Forward has a different code for canceling.  
42  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Station Call Forward  
Procedures  
You can register a Call Forward function by entering the button sequence as  
described or by programming a Programmable Feature Button to perform the  
sequence.  
To use the Call Forward button sequence:  
Follow the instructions in See “Call Forward Examples” on page 4-43,  
shown under the “Button Sequence” heading. Some features require  
additional input, such as:  
Dest. Ext. or Telephone No. – Call Forward destination numbers  
can be internal extension numbers or outside telephone numbers.  
If the destination is an outside number, enter the access code  
used for dialing out (such as 9) + the telephone number + #. The  
telephone system accepts destination numbers of up to 32 digits.  
Timer – Enter the number of seconds (08~60) your telephone  
should ring before forwarding the call. (This is the Call Forward-  
No Answer timer.)  
Call Forward Pass Code – A four-digit Call Forward pass code  
can be set up by your System Administrator and will allow one  
station to activate the call forward setting for another station.  
Users must enter the Call Forward pass code for the station to be  
forwarded.  
To program call forward button destination using the Web-based User  
Administration.  
Login to your Web-based User Adminstration and select Call Forward to turn  
selections on and off. Select Home to program the button.  
Call Forward Examples  
To set your telephone to Call Forward Busy-No Answer to an internal  
extension number:  
Press your extension button + #6041 + 3000# + 10  
#6041 = Call Forward Access Code sequence  
3000# = Internal Extension Number  
10 = Ring time in seconds before Call Forwards  
To set another telephone to Call Forward Busy-No Answer to an outside  
destination number after a set time:  
Press your extension button + #6042 + 1234 + 1111 + # + 9 +1 949  
5873000 + # + 08  
#6042 = Call Forward Busy No Answer Access Code sequence  
1234 = Other telephone’s extension number  
1111 = Call Forward Passcode for other telephone + #  
9 = Outside Line Access Code  
1 949 5553000 = 1 + Area Code + Telephone Number  
# = Must press after entering an outside destination number  
08 = Ring time in seconds before Call Forwards  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Call History  
Incoming calls with Caller ID or ANI information can be optionally recorded  
into a rolling list for the station where the call is ringing. The call is placed in  
the list along with the number, name (if provided), time and date of the call,  
and status of the call (answered, abandoned, or redirected). You can access  
this list from an LCD telephone with a flexible Caller ID button.  
View Call History  
When your station is idle, press the Caller ID button. The Caller ID LED  
lights green and the latest record displays.  
Press Vol + for the next record; press Vol + for the previous  
record.  
To view the call date, time, and status, press SK2 (press again to toggle  
to call name/number).  
44  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Call Park  
The Call Park feature enables you to hold a call temporarily in a location other  
than your telephone. These areas are called orbits. You or another telephone  
user can retrieve a parked call from its orbit by specifying the orbit number.  
You can specify one of 20 General Park Orbits (7000~7019) or a valid  
extension number within the system.  
Once you have parked a call in an orbit, you can:  
Hang up and retrieve the parked call at a later time.  
Originate another call.  
Access a voice paging device to announce the parked call for pickup from  
another station.  
If you park a call and it is not retrieved, it will recall to the parking station and  
one of the following occurs:  
If your station is idle when the system Call Park recall timer expires, the  
parked call automatically recalls to your station.  
If your station is busy, the parked call camps on.  
If you have an LCD telephone, you can let the system automatically select an  
available orbit number which displays on your LCD.  
Park a Call  
1. While on a call, press Park in Orbit or press Cnf/Trn + #33. The LED  
flashes green (consultation-hold). If you were on an extension during the  
call, and you have line button on your telephone, the line LED will flash  
until the call is picked up (depending on programming).  
2. Specify the Park Orbit using one of the following:  
Press and the system automatically selects a General Park  
Orbit between 7000~7019. The chosen orbit appears on the LCD.  
*
Enter a valid extension.  
Press # and the system automatically selects your extension as  
the orbit.  
3. Hang up. The caller’s extension or line number and the orbit number are  
shown. If the parked call is not retrieved within a specified time, the call  
rings back to your telephone. When a parked call recalls your telephone,  
the LCD shows the line or extension that is recalling and the orbit number.  
Retrieve a Parked Call  
1. Press Park in Orbit or press your extension button + #32.  
2. Enter the Orbit Number where the call is parked or # for the extension  
from which you are calling. You cannot use to retrieve a parked call.  
*
The extension LED flashes at the in-use rate when the call is retrieved.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Call Pickup  
You can pick up a call that is ringing another station’s extension, a call placed  
on hold at another station and other types of calls. When you pick up an  
internal call, the calling station and the called station displays on your LCD.  
Group Pickup  
One or more stations can be assigned to a pickup group, there are a total of  
48 pickup groups available. You can easily pick up ringing calls on other  
extensions. Ringing calls include: new, transferred, internal, or external calls.  
You will have the ability to pick up calls for other extensions in your group and  
other groups as well. See your System Administrator for group assignments.  
Ringing, Page or  
Held Call Pickup  
This feature picks up ringing or held calls, including Group Page and All Call  
Page calls. If these types of calls occur at the same time, the pickup priority is  
station-to-station and then Page calls in the order of occurrence. In some  
systems, this feature can be applied to pick up All Call Page exclusively.  
To perform Call Pickup  
Press the buttons shown in the table below for the desired Pickup feature.  
Table 7  
Call Pickup Feature Codes  
To Pick Up:  
Ringing or  
Page Calls  
Press Ext. Button, then dial  
the access sequence below:  
A call ringing or held at the Extension Number. #5#6 + Ext. No.  
Directed DN  
A call Ringing, held or parked at the Ext. No.  
A call ringing a member of your pickup group.  
#5#29 + Ext. No.  
Group  
#5#34  
A call ringing on any line of this Primary Ext.  
No.  
Directed Ext.  
#5#5 + Primary Ext. No.  
A call ringing an extension in this Pickup  
Group.  
Directed Group  
#5#32 + Group No.  
A call ringing this Ext. No. only. Other lines  
ringing on the same phone are unaffected.  
Ext. No.  
#5#22 + Ext. No.  
#5#9  
Outside Calls  
Held Calls  
Any incoming outside line call.  
To Pick Up:  
Press Ext. Button, then dial  
the access sequence below:  
#5#71  
Local Retrieve  
A call held on this telephone.  
A call held on another Primary Ext. No.  
Remote  
Retrieve  
#5#72 + Primary Ext. No.  
Directed Ext.  
Retrieve  
A call held on for this Ext. No., regardless of  
where this Ext. No. appears.  
#5#74 + Ext. No.  
Notes:  
The Primary extension number is the directory number by which the  
telephone set is defined. Other, non-primary extension numbers may also  
appear on the telephone. By convention, the Primary extension number is  
assigned to the first button (on the bottom left-hand side) of a multi-button  
telephone.  
If more than one call is on hold, the call on the telephone’s lowest button  
number is picked up.  
Ringing calls are picked up over held calls as a priority.  
46  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Call Transfer  
Call transfer allows a call to be directed from one telephone to another on  
IPedge Net.  
External transfers to telephone numbers or network extensions off IPedge Net  
are also supported, please check with your System Administrator to see if this  
is enabled.  
There are two types of call transfer:  
Blind transfer – The call is directly transferred to another extension  
without announcing the call or waiting to see if the caller is available.  
Supervised transfer – The call is “supervised” during the transfer process  
so the call can be announced to the receiving party before completing the  
transfer. A supervised transfer also allows the person originating the  
transfer to take back or cancel the transfer.  
Perform Call Transfer  
1. While on a call, press the TRNS Soft Key.  
Immediate  
2. Dial the extension where you want to transfer the call.The call rings the  
destination station and your telephone returns to the idle state. If your  
telephone does not go idle, the destination may be located in a remote  
node, so you need to hang up to return to idle state.  
Note: For DN in remote node, the user can transfer by entering # after DN is  
entered.  
Transfer Using The Cnf/trn  
Button  
1. While on a call, press Cnf/Trn. Your Line LED flashes green and you  
hear an internal dial tone.  
2. Dial the extension where the call will be transferred. You can remain on  
the line and announce the call or hang up to complete a “blind transfer.”  
Note: If the privacy option has been disabled, then if you use a Line button  
when you transfer the call, the LED will flash red until the receiving  
party answers. While the LED is flashing, you can press the Line  
button to return to the call. If the receiving party answers the call, the  
LED turns solid red and you cannot reconnect to the original caller.  
During call transfer, you can connect all three parties by pressing the  
Cnf/Trn button or by pressing the JOIN soft key. This allows the  
three parties to talk together.  
3. Transfer with Camp On: If the station where you want to transfer the call is  
busy, you may hang up and the transferred trunk or station will be camped  
on to the busy destination.  
Transfer A Call Directly To  
Voice Mail (Vm)  
1. While on a call, press Cnf/Trn.  
2. Enter #407.  
3. Enter the VM mailbox number (usually the same as the extension  
number) + #.  
4. Hang up and the caller is connected to the VM mailbox. This feature does  
a blind transfer to VM.  
Transfer A Call Directly To  
Vm With A Dss Button  
1. While on a call, press Cnf/Trn.  
2. Press the DSS button programmed to the voice mail number.  
3. Hang up and the caller is connected to the VM mailbox.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Call Waiting  
You can answer a call that is transferred to your station, even when your  
station is busy. When another call is camped onto your station, you hear two  
Camp-on tone beeps and the extension or Line LED flashes red (on-hold).  
If a call is sent to your station when busy, and your station does not have an  
extension button available to receive the call, two camp-on tone beeps are  
sent to your telephone. You must disconnect or transfer the existing call to  
answer the waiting call.  
Place Current Call on Hold  
to Answer Waiting Call  
Press Hold. The existing call is placed on hold. The camped-on line rings  
your station (the Line LED flashes green - incoming call) or, if your telephone  
has the Auto Hold feature, just press the flashing extension button.  
You are connected to the transferred call. The extension or Line LED flashes  
green (in-use).  
Note: See your System Administrator to find out if you have Auto Hold.  
Using the Flashing  
Extension Call to Answer  
Waiting Call  
Press the flashing extension or Line. The existing call is placed on hold. The  
camped-on line rings your station (the Line LED flashes green - incoming  
call). This disconnects the current call and connects you to the transferred  
call. The extension or Line LED flashes green (in-use).  
Caller ID  
Incoming calls to your extension with Caller ID can be recorded into a rolling  
list that is saved on your telephone. The call information is placed in the list  
along with the number, name (if provided), time and date of the call, and  
status of the call (answered, abandoned, or redirected). You can access this  
list from an LCD telephone with a flexible Caller ID button.  
Caller Information  
The caller’s number and name can be displayed on the IPT or attendant  
console’s LCD. The caller information is stored in the system, retrieved at  
relevant extension stations, recorded on SMDR, and sent to an external  
server and client through CTI link, if necessary.  
Caller information can also be sent to a voice mail device integrated into the  
IPedge system.  
Display Caller Information  
When the caller information is provided from a station, it is indicated at a  
destination station (IPT or attendant console).  
The caller information displays at the relevant station even when the  
destination differs from the original destination due to transfer or Call  
Forward.  
On the line where the caller information is not provided temporarily or it is not  
provided originally, “LN xxx” will display.  
Notification of Caller  
Information  
Automatic Number Identification (ANI), CLASS, Calling Line Identification  
Presentation (CLIP) and Calling Name Identification (CNIP) are the services  
used to send the caller number from a public telephone network.  
View Saved Caller ID  
Information  
1. When your station is idle, press the Caller ID button.The Caller ID LED  
lights green and the latest record displays.  
2. Use the soft keys (Next, Prev, Call or Exit).  
Note: Caller ID is displayed when a call is first answered and displays for  
the first 15 seconds of the telephone call.  
48  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Conterence Call  
You can conference together up to eight parties (including yourself). The  
actual number of conference parties with acceptable volume levels depends  
on the local and far end telephone line conditions.  
The person who initiates the conference call is the Master. If, after the  
conference is established, the Master exits the conference, the first station to  
have been added to the conference becomes the Master.  
Set up a Conference Call  
1. While on a call, press Cnf/Trn. You hear a dial tone and your Line LED  
flashes green.  
2. Call another station or outside line.  
3. When the called party answers, press Cnf/Trn. If you receive a busy  
tone or no answer, press Cnf/Trn again to return to the original  
connection.  
4. All parties are conferenced. If the second call was placed on a Line that  
appears on your telephone, the LED also flashes green.  
5. Repeat steps 1~3 until all parties are added or the maximum number of  
parties is reached.  
6. ??When the Master of the conference hangs up, the control is  
automatically transferred to the first internal station added to the  
conference call. If no other internal stations are included in the conference  
call, the call will be disconnected.  
Note: An SLT or SIP station cannot be used as a Master for a conference  
call.  
Transfer Conference  
Control  
1. Complete Steps 1 and 2 above to add the line where you want to transfer  
conference control. See previous Note.  
2. Announce the call and hang up to transfer it. This station now becomes  
the conference Master with the ability to add or delete parties.  
Hold a Conference Call  
If you are the Conference Master, press the Hold button once (or twice for  
Executive Hold) to place the conference call on hold. The other parties can  
continue with the conference. Music-on-hold is suppressed and your  
extension LED flashes green. You can rejoin the conference at any time by  
pressing your extension button. When you return, you retain Master status.  
Adding Voice Mail to a  
Conference  
The Conference Master can add voice mail to a conference. This feature  
enables participants in a conference to listen to or leave a voice mail message  
during a conference call.  
Add Voice Mail to a  
conference call  
(performed by Conference  
Master)  
1. Press Cnf/Trn to place the current call on Consultation Hold.  
2. Dial the voice mail (VM) extension number, then enter the VM mailbox  
and security code. This adds the voice mailbox to the conference.  
3. Press Cnf/Trn to reconnect to the original party. (You can continue to  
add conference members by pressing Cnf/Trn and dialing another  
extension.)  
Now, all parties in the conference can listen to or record a message to  
this voice mailbox. Only the Master can control the VM with Soft  
Keys.  
Supervising a Tandem  
Call  
1. While talking on an outside call, press Cnf/Trn. You hear a dial tone. The  
extension LED flashes (conference rate).  
2. Dial an outside telephone number.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
3. After the party answers, press Cnf/Trn. The extension LED flashes (in-  
use rate) and all parties are conferenced.  
4. If you receive a busy tone or if the station does not answer, press the  
flashing extension button to return to the original connection.  
5. Press Cnf/Trn and hang up. The extension LED flashes (exclusive-hold  
rate) and the two lines are connected. The LED turns Off when the parties  
hang-up.  
6. To supervise a tandem call, press the extension button. If the parties have  
finished, hang up. If the parties are still talking, press Cnf/Trn and hang-  
up. Both Line LEDs turn Off and the connection is released.  
If your telephone company provides automatic disconnect  
supervision, the connection will release automatically when the  
parties hang up. If not, the lines must be supervised to be  
disconnected.  
Conference Add/Split/  
If you initiate a conference with two or more parties, you can continue to add  
outside callers to conference; or you and another member of the conference  
can leave (Split) the conference for a private conversation. During this time,  
other conference members remain connected.  
Join/Drop  
You can then Join both of you back into the conference, or you can Drop  
(disconnect) the member you are connected to. This feature is performed with  
Soft Keys if you have a LCD phone or with a Split button programmed on one  
of your Programmable Feature Buttons.  
This feature also works for remote stations which are connected through  
IPedge Net.  
Important! You must be a conference master to perform the Add,  
Split, and Drop features. The conference master is the  
person that initiates the conference call. If that person  
drops from the conference, the first person added to  
the conference becomes the conference master.  
Add an Incoming call to  
the Conference  
1. Place the first caller/Conference on hold.  
2. Answer the incoming ringing call.  
3. While speaking to the incoming caller, press Cnf/Trn button.  
4. Press the blinking DN where the first caller/Conference was placed on  
hold.  
5. Press Cnf/Trn twice to join all parties together.  
Split from a conference  
1. While in a conference call on an IP5000-series phone, press the SPLT  
(Split) soft key or Split button.  
2. Press the NEXT soft key until you see the extension number for the party  
that you want to Split out of the conference.  
3. You can return both yourself and the other Split party back into the  
conference by pressing JOIN.  
RTRN terminates a feature operation and returns to the previously  
displayed state.  
Drop the Split party from a  
conference  
Press the DROP Soft Key. The party that you are talking to privately (the party  
which you have Split from the conference) will be disconnected (Dropped)  
and you will rejoin the conference.  
50  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
If you are in a three-way conference and Split with one of the parties, the  
remaining party will essentially be “on hold” until you return to the conference.  
Direct Station  
Selection (DSS)  
This optional feature enables you to use a DSS button to connect directly to  
another station’s line extension. The DSS LED shows the status (idle/busy) of  
the station and/or the station’s primary extension. For example, a station’s  
DSS button LED shows busy (light steady red) when the station is:  
Busy on a call on any button.  
Idle but all appearances of the station’s extension are in use by other  
stations.  
When the station is in DND, the LED flashes red.  
Connect Directly to  
Another Station’s  
Extension  
1. When connected to a line or another station, press DSS.  
The original party is put on hold. You can call a station even if the  
DSS LED shows busy (steady red).  
2. Announce the call or transfer the call by hanging up or pressing  
Release.  
Note: You can transfer the call to an idle or busy station.  
Do Not Disturb  
If your station is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, internal, external and  
transferred calls do not ring your station and Off-hook Call Announce calls are  
denied. You can continue to make calls while in the DND mode. When  
originating a call in DND mode, you will hear a short burst of interrupted dial  
tone followed by continuous dial tone. You can start dialing at any time during  
either tone.  
If you put your Primary extension into DND mode, all calls to that telephone  
are rejected. If your extension is set for Call Forward-Busy or Call Forward-  
Busy/No Answer, the call is redirected to the forwarding destination  
immediately.  
If you put an extension other than the Primary extension into DND, only calls  
to that extension on your telephone will be blocked. Appearances of that  
extension on other telephones continue to ring.  
To activate DND on your Primary extension  
Press Do Not Disturb or #6091 (hear Success Tone). The LED lights  
steady red and DND mode is activated for the entire station.  
To activate DND on a non-Primary extension  
Press the desired extension appearance and Do Not Disturb or  
#6091 (hear Success Tone). The LED lights steady red and DND mode  
is activated for that extension on your telephone.  
To deactivate DND  
Press Do Not Disturb or #6092 (hear Success Tone). The LED lights  
goes out and DND mode is de-activated.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Setting DND for  
Another Extension  
To activate DND for another extension  
Enter #6191 (hear Entry Tone) + the Primary extension of the remote  
extension + the pass code + # (hear Success Tone). This sets DND as if  
activated by the Primary extension on the target telephone.  
To deactivate DND for another extension  
Enter #6192 (hear Entry Tone) + the Primary extension of the remote  
extension + the pass code + # (hear Success Tone). This removes DND  
from the target telephone.  
To change your DND Pass Code  
Enter #670 (hear Entry Tone) + ext. no. (hear Entry Tone) + old pass  
code + # (hear Entry Tone) + new pass code + # (hear Success Tone).  
If you activate DND while a call is ringing, the ringing stops. The LED  
continues to flash on your telephone and ring on other appearances.  
Emergency Call  
To make an emergency call, dial 911 or Access Code + 911. This  
depends on off-hook preference set up for your telephone.  
Note: Check with your System Administrator for the Access Code because  
this code may be different from the one used to get an outside line.  
Emergency  
Monitoring Station  
Your system may have one IP telephone assigned as an emergency  
monitoring station. If your telephone has this assignment, your line LED will  
flash green when someone makes a 911 call. When you answer the call, you  
can listen in and participate in the conversation. See your System  
Administrator for more information on this feature.  
Emergency Ringdown  
If a station remains off-hook for a programmable period, it can be  
automatically treated as an Emergency Call and directed to an emergency  
destination. The station may have partially dialed a number or have dialed no  
digits at all. Each station is programmed with its specific emergency ringdown  
destination.  
A station number or a group pilot number can be specified as an emergency  
ringdown destination. In a private network, the station or pilot number must be  
in the same network node.  
Language Codes  
This feature enables you to change the language sent from the Attendant  
Console or from a PC. See your System Administrator to find out if your  
telephone is programmed with the ability to change languages.  
To change the Language Display  
Enter the Change Language access code #495 + the Language Code  
(see below).  
52  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
1: English date format – MM/DD (/YY)  
2: British English – DD/MM (/YY)  
3: French – DD/MM (/YY)  
4: Spanish – DD/MM (/YY)  
Message Waiting  
Message Waiting is shown on the Msg button which flashes red when there  
are messages waiting. The waiting message indicators can come from the  
voice mail system or they can be internal messages sent from other  
extensions.  
The messages from other extensions are notifications that someone has  
called your extension and wants you to call them back.  
An extension can receive up to three Message Waiting indications, one  
additional indicator will always be reserved for the voice mail system.  
Note: If there are Phantom DNs (PhDNs) programmed on an extension,  
each PhDN can receive up to three message waiting indicators.  
Responding to a Lit Msg  
LED  
1. Press the Red flashing Msg button. The telephone will dial the message  
source (the voice mail or another extension). See Note below.  
2. When the call is finished, hang up and the message waiting indicator will  
clear.  
3. If the Msg LED continues to flash, there are additional messages to  
check, repeat steps 1-2.  
Voice mail devices have a short delay in turning off the message waiting  
indicators.  
4. To manually turn off the Msg LED, press your extension button, then enter  
#409. Repeat this sequence until all the messages are cleared.  
Notes:  
If there is a + on the LCD, press the Next Soft Key to scroll through the  
messages sent to that extension.  
To see who has sent you messages, or to retrieve the messages, press  
the flashing Msg button.  
Turning On/Off MW LED  
on Another Extension  
When an extension is called, the calling party can choose to send a message  
to the called party. This is a notification to say that a call has been missed and  
the calling party would like to be called back.  
By sending a message to another extension you turn on their Msg LED.  
1. Dial an internal extension. You may hear ringing or busy tone.  
2. Press Msg or 7. The Msg LED flashes red on the called telephone. At  
your telephone, the Msg LED lights steady red and the LCD shows the  
station number where the Message Waiting light was sent.  
3. If you decide to cancel the Message Waiting light at this point, press Msg  
or 7 again while ring-over tone is playing and the light will cancel. If you  
want to cancel the message later, call the telephone where you set the  
message and press 7 twice.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
4. Press Spkr. Your Msg LED turns Off. The Msg LED on the called  
telephone flashes until the called party presses the flashing Msg button  
which calls you back.  
5. Turn off the Message LED.  
The two ways to turn Off a Message LED are:  
Method 1  
1. Press #64 plus the extension number that has the message light  
set.  
2. Press Spkr or hang up to end the call.  
Method 2  
1. Dial the extension that has the Message LED.  
2. Press 77.  
3. Press Spkr or hang up to release your telephone.  
Microphone Cut-Off  
This feature prevents callers from monitoring the sounds near your telephone  
when your telephone receives a Handsfree Call or cuts-off the telephone  
microphone while on a speakerphone call. When the feature is ON, the  
Microphn Cut-off LED lights steady red and the Mic and Spkr LEDs do not  
light when your telephone is called. When the feature is OFF, the Microphn  
Cut-off LED is not lit and your microphone works. The Microphn Cut-off  
functions on Handsfree Answerback and speaker OCA calls for privacy.  
To turn the microphone ON/OFF  
Press Microphn Cut-off to toggle between ON/OFF.  
Off-Hook Call  
Announce (OCA)  
Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) enables you to complete a call to a busy  
telephone. Your telephone must be programmed to either announce  
automatically or to announce after you press a button on your dial pad. The  
destination telephone must be programmed to accept an OCA. The  
announcement may be delivered over the speaker.  
Make an OCA Call  
Manual – Dial an extension. When you hear a busy tone press 5 and,  
after one long tone, you can talk through the speaker of the destination  
telephone. The person you are calling has answering options as  
described below.  
Automatic – If your telephone and the extension you are calling have  
been programmed for Automatic OCA, you can talk through the speaker  
of the destination telephone without hearing the busy tone and without  
dialing 5.  
Answer a Speaker OCA  
Call  
1. If you have a handset call in progress and you hear one tone, this  
indicates that a second station is calling. The second caller connects to  
the speaker in your telephone. The Spkr LED flashes and the Mic LED  
lights. You will be speaking to the first caller through your handset and the  
second caller through the microphone.  
54  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
2. To turn off your microphone speaker to the second party, you can press  
Mic or Microphn Cut-off; the Mic LED turns Off. You will no longer be  
talking to the second caller, although the caller can still speak through  
your speaker.  
3. Press Mic or Microphn Cut-off again to reconnect to the second  
caller. You can toggle as often as you choose. If you do not want the first  
caller to hear your conversation with the second caller, cover the  
mouthpiece of your handset.  
Speaker Off-hook Call  
Announce  
IP5000-series telephones can receive Speaker OCA which enables stations  
to receive internal calls over their speaker while on another call using the  
handset.  
Override  
Override Calls  
The available override features are:  
Busy Override  
Do Not Disturb Override  
Executive Override  
Destination Restriction/Traveling Class Override  
Class of Service Override  
Privacy Override  
Busy Override  
Ring Over Busy Override enables you to send a muted ring tone to a busy  
station to indicate a call is waiting. The Busy Override (BOV) muted ring can  
be programmed for each station to be two muted rings only or continued  
muted rings until the call is answered. This option applies to the station  
receiving the muted ring. The muted ring can be sent to the telephone  
speaker or to the telephone handset/headset and speaker.  
To use Busy Override  
After reaching a busy station, press 2. A muted tone is heard at the busy  
station, indicating that a call is waiting. The station number displays.  
Do Not Disturb Override  
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override lets you send a call waiting tone or ringing to a  
station in DND mode to indicate that a call is coming in. Your telephone may  
be programmed to block DND Override from other telephones. Your station’s  
LCD shows that the station you have called is in the DND mode.  
OCA is possible to DND stations from stations that are programmed for DND  
Override.  
To use DND Override  
After reaching a station in DND mode, press 2. A tone signal is heard at  
the DND station, indicating a call is coming in. On your station, the LCD  
shows the station number you have overridden.  
Your LCD displays DND OVR DENY if the station you called denies  
DND Override.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Executive Override  
Executive Override enables you to enter an established conversation. Your  
telephone can also be programmed to block Executive Override from other  
telephones.  
To perform Executive Override  
After reaching a busy station, press 3  
Or, if you have an LCD telephone, use the OVRD Soft Key. You enter  
a conference with the busy station and the party to whom he was  
talking. The called parties may hear an optional tone signal prior to  
your entering the conversation.  
Your LCD displays EXEC OVR DENY if the station you called denies  
Executive Override. If you do not have Override privileges, you will  
camp on.  
Destination Restriction/  
Traveling Class Override  
Enables a station user to override the Destination Restriction or Traveling  
Class of a particular telephone by entering a pre-determined account code.  
To use Destination Restriction or Traveling Class Override  
1. Press #471. A Confirmation tone plays and the LCD shows “Enter OVR  
Code.”  
2. Enter the trunk access code or LCR access code.  
3. Dial the external telephone number.  
Class of Service Override  
By dialing a Class of Service (COS) Override code, a user can change a  
station’s set of privileges to one associated with the override code. When the  
call is terminated and another is attempted from the same station, the original  
COS is applied. This allows selected users to override restrictions that are  
placed on any telephone in the system.  
To perform Class of Service Override  
1. Access a Primary or Phantom DN. You hear a dial tone and the LED  
flashes at the in-use rate.  
2. Press #471. Dial tone stops. Your LCD prompts you to enter a code.  
3. Enter the COS Override Code (four digits). You hear a dial tone.  
4. Dial a telephone number.  
Note: For security reasons, the override codes are only available on a  
selected basis. See your System Administrator.  
Privacy Override  
This feature enables you to enter an established call on a line you share with  
another telephone. Up to two station users can enter an existing Central  
Office (CO) line-to-station call (i.e., up to three stations can be connected to a  
CO line). You can also use this feature if the station that is already connected  
to the CO line is in the Privacy Release mode.  
Station users with Privacy Release can allow stations with the shared  
button appearance to enter their conversations, even if the station entering  
the conversation is not programmed for Privacy Override.  
56  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Paging  
Station users can make page announcements to telephones. Check with your  
System Administrator to find out the zone numbers for various paging groups.  
Verify with your System Administrator if there are sufficient vacant media  
resources for successful paging.  
To make a Page announcement to telephones:  
1. Lift the handset, press your extension button and enter a paging access  
code.  
2. Make your announcement, then hang up.  
To make a Group Page  
Press Group Page and enter the Group number (01~24)  
or  
press extension + #31 and enter the zone number.  
Answering a Page  
To answer a Group Page, lift the handset off-hook, dial #5#36 and enter  
the Page Zone number (01~08, depending on your telephone system).  
To answer an External Page Zone, lift the handset off-hook, dial #5#36  
and enter the Page Zone number (01~08, depending on your telephone  
system).  
All Call Page  
You can make an All Call Page to telephones assigned to the “All Call Page  
Group.” Stations are assigned to the “All Call Page Group” in system  
programming.  
To make an All Call Page:  
1. With the handset off-hook, press All Call Page  
or  
Dial #30. This pages all telephones in the All Call Page Group but,  
depending on system programming, you may or may not page  
external speakers.  
2. Make your announcement then hang up.  
Answer All Call Page  
Emergency Page  
1. Lift the handset off-hook, dial #5#36.  
2. Enter the Page Zone Number (01~08, depending on your telephone  
system).  
An Emergency Page overrides Group Pages or All Call Pages to telephone  
and external paging devices.  
To make an Emergency Page, lift the handset off-hook, dial #37.  
To make an Emergency Page to a group, lift the handset off-hook, dial  
#38 and enter the Group number.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Privacy  
Privacy controls the ability of more than one person to use the same  
extension at the same time. Privacy applies to multiple appearances of  
extensions, Phantom extensions, outside Lines, and outside Line Group  
buttons. The application of Privacy to individual telephones is controlled in  
system programming.  
By default, the system is private. If you are in a conversation, another  
telephone with an appearance of the line on which you are talking cannot  
intrude unless that telephone has been programmed for Privacy Override. In  
that event, the other telephone may enter and leave the conversation at will. If  
all users are provided with Privacy Release in Class of Service, the system  
will function as non-private.  
Your telephone may be equipped with a Privacy Release and/or a  
Privacy on Line button. On a normally private telephone, Privacy  
Release allows other appearances of your line to join the conversation. On a  
normally non-private telephone, Privacy on Line allows you to exclude  
others. The Privacy condition may be toggled at any time during a  
conversation. At the end of the conversation, the line’s privacy condition  
returns to its original state.  
Use Privacy Release  
While on a CO line call, press Privacy Release. The LED lights red.  
The outside line flashes at all appearances. When another station user  
enters the outside line call by pressing a common outside Line, the  
Privacy Release LED turns Off.  
To add a third station, press Privacy Release again; the process  
repeats.  
Set/Cancel Privacy  
Press Privacy on Line to set privacy. The LED lights steady red.  
Others are blocked from entering your outside line calls when they press  
a common Line.  
Press Privacy on Line again to cancel the feature. The LED turns Off.  
Redial  
Use this button to redial the last number dialed from your telephone.  
To redial the last number, press Redial or 0.  
*
Speed Dial  
Speed Dial (SD) enables you to dial a sequence of up to 32 digits with a  
shorter code. Dial sequences can include telephone numbers, authorization  
codes, passwords feature activation codes, and pauses. Speed Dial may be  
used to originate a call or invoked after a call is established. There are two  
types of Speed Dial:  
System SD – All telephones in your system can share a list of up to 800  
System Speed Dial numbers under the exclusive control of the System  
Administrator. In some cases, System Speed Dial enables you to reach  
numbers that you would not be allowed to dial directly from your  
telephone.  
Station SD – Your System Administrator allocates a block of up to 100  
personal SD numbers (10 per telephone). You have exclusive use of  
them and you can create and change them from your own telephone. If  
58  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
you have a 9-Line LCD telephone, you can assign names to your station  
SD numbers to appear on the Personal SD Directory display (see your  
System Administrator or use the procedure for “Storing Personal Speed  
Dial Names” on page 4-61.)  
Personal Speed Dial  
1. See your System Administrator to check how many personal Speed Dial  
numbers are allocated to your telephone and if you have Speed Dial  
capabilities enabled on your telephone.  
2. Set up / Store your personal Speed Dial numbers.  
3. Assign names to personal Speed Dial numbers (on supported models).  
Making a Call Using Speed  
Dial  
There are two ways to begin a Speed Dial Call.  
1. Press Spdial on an IP5000-series digital telephone  
or press the button on any telephone.  
*
2. Dial the Station or System Speed Dial Number. Station Speed Dial  
numbers occupy numbers 100~199. System Speed Dial numbers occupy  
numbers 200~999.  
Table 8:  
Feature  
Feature Access Code Sequences  
Speed Dial (Dialing an SD number)  
a
b
Station  
Spdial + nnn  
nnn = 100~199 Station SD numbers  
1
2
System  
Spdial + nnn  
nnn = 200~999 System SD numbers  
a. Stations must be assigned/enabled Speed Dial capabilities in system programming.  
b. If your telephone does not have a Spdial button, press the * button, then dial the three digit Speed Dial  
bin number (nnn).  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
Storing a System/Station  
Speed Dial Number  
1. Dial #66. The display shows “SPEED DIAL” and you hear Entry Tone.  
2. Dial the Station Speed Dial number (100~199) or System Speed Dial  
number (200~999). The LCD shows your digits and you hear Entry Tone.  
3. Dial the telephone number to be stored + #. Include any required access  
and area codes. The LCD shows “SPEED DIAL” + the Speed Dial  
Number + destination + #. You hear Success Tone.  
4. Lift handset.  
5. To enter another number repeat steps 1-4. Refer to Table 7.  
6. Example: To store a Station Speed Dial number to Speed dial location  
100, dial #66 + 100 + 99495833000 + #  
Table 9:  
Feature  
Feature Access Code Sequences  
Speed Dial (Storing an SD number)  
a
b
Station  
#66 + nnn + Phone No. + #  
nnn = 100~199 SD bin numbers  
System1  
#66 + nnn + Phone No.2 + #  
nnn = 200~999 SD bin numbers  
a. Stations must be assigned/enabled Speed Dial capabilities in system programming.  
b. Refer to Table 7 to see how to enter * and # into a speed dial phone number.  
Special Characters  
See Table 7.  
SD numbers may include 0~9, #, and Pause. For an example on how to use special characters,  
*
Table 10:  
Entry  
Meaning  
0~9  
0~9  
#
End of Speed Dial Number when entering via access code (#66)  
Escape. “ ” functions as an escape key indicating that the number imme-  
*
*
diately following represents something exceptional. When is used as  
*
an escape character, it consumes one Speed Dial digit. Entering 7 to  
*
insert a seven-second pause would use two of 32 characters.  
A pause from 1~9 seconds. To pause longer than 9 seconds, enter more  
pause escape sequences. Example: To insert a 17-second pause, press  
*
(1 ~  
*9*8. A “P” displays denoting a pause in the SD number. In this exam-  
9)  
ple, you would see “PP.”  
is entered into the speed dial string.  
*
**  
*
#
# is entered into the speed dial string.  
Speed Dial Capabilities  
Go to Enterprise Manager.  
1. Click on Station > Station Assignment.  
2. Click on the Basic tab.  
3. Enter the desired number of SpDial Bins.  
60  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
4. Set System Speed Dial to enable/disable. Default is Disable.  
5. Click on the Save icon.  
Long SD Numbers  
Up to 32 digits can be stored in one SD location. If you exceed 32 digits, the  
excess digits are automatically stored in the next sequential SD location. If SD  
100 contains 40 digits, then 8 of those digits would be stored in SD 101. If you  
save other digits to SD101 they will over-write the eight digits automatically  
stored there.  
Storing Personal Speed  
Dial Names  
You can store names with Personal Speed Dial numbers. These names will  
display as Soft Keys which can be used for dialing from the telephone LCD  
directories.  
Notes:  
Speed Dial locations must be assigned to your telephone by your System  
Administrator before you can store names. Your System Administrator  
can also associate names with Station Speed Dial numbers.  
Only the Administrator telephone can store System Speed Dial numbers.  
Assign Station Speed Dial  
Names  
Web-based User Administration  
1. Login and select Speed Dial, then select or enter the desired Speed Dial  
Index and set the number and name.  
2. Enter a Speed Dial location number (100~199 for personal speed dial or  
200~999 for System speed dial, depending on system programming).  
3. Enter the telephone number to be stored. If you normally dial a line  
access code (such as 9) and/or an area code, enter the codes before the  
telephone number.  
4. Input the name you want to appear in the Personal SD directory (nine  
characters max).  
5. Click on Save icon to register the information.  
Time and Date Setting  
(Local)  
IP telephones will display the time, day and date of the time zone of the  
telephone system location it is connected to. If the IP telephone is not located  
in the same time zone as the telephone system, the IP telephone can be used  
to change the time, day and date of the IP Telephone to the local time zone in  
which the telephone is located.  
To change the Date  
From the IP telephone, dial #653 and enter YYMMDD#  
Example: To set the date to March 12, 2008.  
YY = Year, example 08  
MM = Month, example 03  
DD = Day, example 12  
Note: The IP telephone date can only be changed one day before or after  
the telephone system date. The day will change automatically when  
the date is changed.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
To change the time  
From the IP telephone, dial #654 and enter HHMMSS#  
Example: To change the time to 01:30 PM  
HH = Hour, example 13 (range is 00~23, 24 hour clock must be  
entered)  
MM = Minutes 30 (range is 00~60. It must be within 15 minutes of  
system time.)  
SS = Seconds (range is 00~60).  
Note: The time set must be within 15 minutes of system time.  
Tone First / Voice  
First Signalling  
To determine the signalling on the telephone circuit.  
Tone First Signalling  
When the telephone rings and the called party must press Spkr or lift the  
handset in order to receive the call.  
Voice First  
Signalling  
The telephone does not ring when it is being called, rather a long tone is  
heard, followed by the caller's voice coming through the speaker. This method  
automatically starts in a hands free mode and allows both parties to speak  
with each other.  
Note: The calling party has control over whether Tone First or Voice First  
Signaling is being used. The ability to switch between the two is setup  
by the System Administrator.  
To change the signalling method while placing the call  
1. Enter the extension number  
2. Press 1 to turn on Tone First Signaling.  
3. Press 2 to turn on Voice First Signaling.  
Uniform Call  
Distribution  
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) provides ACD-like service based on the  
simplified Distributed Hunt feature. Incoming calls are answered by Voice Mail  
as the Auto Attendant function or they can be directly routed to the UCD  
(Distributed Hunt) Pilot number. The caller will dial the UCD Pilot station in  
response to a prompt. The call will go to the next agent or, if all agents are  
busy, the call will camp-on to the Distributed Hunt pilot and ring-back tone or  
Music-on-Hold (MOH) will be sent.  
This feature distributes incoming calls to available agents. Agents must be  
logged into the group to receive UCD calls. The following illustration shows  
the typical call flow for this service.  
1. Agent logs into the UCD group.  
The call is received from PSTN or extension.  
62  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Feature Operations  
2. The call is routed to voice mail which provides the initial greeting using the  
auto attendant service.  
3. The voice mail can be configured to prompt callers to enter the  
destination number or to route the call to the pre-determined destination.  
4. The voice mail transfers the call to the UCD pilot group.  
5. According to the hunting rule (distribute), the call is delivered to an idle  
agent who logs in to this hunting group.  
If no agent is available in the hunting group, the call is queued to the UCD  
pilot group. The caller may hear the Music on Hold (MOH) or Ring Back Tone  
(RBT) depending on the configuration. If the call cannot be answered within  
the preconfigured time, the call is routed to an overflow destination.  
Login/Logout  
Login and Logout is controlled by the Login key assigned to the agent phone.  
The Log status is displayed on the Login key as shown below  
Login - Key is On Steady  
Logout - Key is Off  
The Login/Logout feature is applied to the call which terminates to UCD pilot  
only. Therefore, the call can terminate to agent Prime or Phantom PDN  
directly even if the agent is in Logout state. Also, Login/Logout can be  
activated by an access code. The default numbering plan is shown below.  
Access Code  
#6061  
Feature  
Login - from Agent Station  
#6062  
Logout - from Agent Station  
#6161 + DN + #  
#6162 + DN + #  
Login - Agent Station (DN) from another station  
Logout – Agent Station (DN) from another sta-  
tion  
where DN = the Directory number of the agent station.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messaging Features  
5
Access your  
Mailbox by Phone  
The following information is required:  
Phone number to call the voice messaging system (this may be different from  
inside and outside of the organization)  
Your mailbox number  
Your security code (password)  
Many organizations allow you to access your mailbox directly from your office  
phone by pressing the “Message” button. When using this button, you are  
prompted for your password. If you don’t see this button on your phone, contact  
your system administrator to see if it is available.  
Set up Your  
Mailbox for the  
First Time  
The first time you access your mailbox, the system asks you a few questions to  
set up your mailbox.  
1. Enter your initial default password.  
If you do not have this, it can be obtained from your system administrator.  
Once you enter your default password you are prompted to change it for  
security purposes.  
2. Record your first and last name.  
This identifies your mailbox when you log in, as well as identifies your mailbox  
to other internal subscribers.  
3. Record your personal greeting.  
This is the greeting callers hear when directed to your mailbox. You can  
change your personal greeting at any time in the future, or set up a temporary  
(extended absence) greeting. Refer to Chapter 4 – Greetings for more  
information on personal greetings.  
If your mailbox is enabled with voice commands, the first time you access your  
mailbox you also hear a short tutorial that guides you on using spoken commands  
to navigate your mailbox.  
Once you have completed this set up process, the system notifies you there are  
any new messages in your mailbox.  
To access the New User Setup at any time in the future, press 7 from the main  
system options menu.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Messaging Features  
Check New Messages  
Most organizations have a message indicator light on office phones. By  
default the message indicator will light up when you have a new voice  
message, but some system administrators will also set it up to indicate when  
you have a new fax message.  
To check new messages and access your voicemail box:  
1. You will need the following information:  
Phone number to call the voice messaging system (this may be  
different from inside and outside of the organization)  
Your mailbox number  
Your security code (password)  
2. From the Subscriber’s menu, press 1 to review new messages. The  
system will play any priority stamped messages first.  
You can also receive a text message to your cell phone or pager when a new  
message arrives, or set up a “call-out” where the system will call any  
designated phone number (e.g. a cell phone or home phone) when a  
message has been left in your voicemail box. To learn how to activate and  
deactivate these Message Notification options, review Chapter 6 – Personal  
Options.  
Review saved  
messages  
Saved messages are messages you have already heard and saved. A  
message is moved to your saved messages when you press 1 during or after  
message playback. The length of time a saved message is kept before being  
permanently deleted (for example, 30 days) is set by your system  
administrator. Your system administrator will also designate if you receive  
notification that a saved message is about to be permanently deleted,  
providing you with the opportunity to save it again if you wish to keep it for a  
longer period of time.  
To review saved messages:  
1. Call the voice messaging system  
2. Press 1 2 from the subscriber’s menu to review saved messages.  
Envelope Information  
Press 8 while listening or after listening to the message to find out who sent  
the message as well as the date and time sent.  
While listening to a message, you can press 4 to rewind or 6 to fast forward  
(in increments of five seconds or as programmed by the system  
administrator). You can also press 5 to pause the message and 5 again to  
resume it (it automatically resumes after 60 seconds or as programmed by  
the administrator).  
66  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Messaging Features  
Volume /Speed  
Control  
You can use the following keys at any time during message playback to  
change message volume or message speed.  
Press 9 then one of the following keys:  
1 Low Volume  
2 Normal Volume  
3 High Volume  
4 Low speed  
5 Normal speed  
6 High speed  
Reply to a Message  
During message playback or after the message has finished playing, you can  
reply to the sender of the message. The message will be delivered directly to  
the sender’s voicemail box.  
1. Press 7 1 while listening to a message or after the message has finished  
playing.  
You can use the following keys at any time during message playback:  
1 Save the message  
2 Listen to next message  
3 Erase the message  
# Repeat the message  
7 Reply / Redirect the message  
8 Envelope information  
9 Speed or volume control  
2. The system will prompt you to record a message. Use the following  
options to send the message.  
1 Delivery message  
2 Review message  
3 Rerecord message  
0 Delivery options (see Chapter 3 – Sending Messages for more  
information on delivery options)  
Cancel and exit  
*
Call Back Directly  
In addition to replying directly to a mailbox, you can also call back the sender  
of a message. This option will ring their phone rather than send a message to  
their mailbox.  
1. Press 7 while listening to a message or after the message has finished  
playing.  
2. You now have a few options:  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Messaging Features  
To call the number and delete the message, press 3  
To call the number and save the message, press 4  
To call the number and keep the message as new, press 5  
3. The system will place you on hold while it transfers your call.  
Redirect a Message  
During message playback or after the message has finished playing, you can  
redirect (forward) a message to another subscriber’s voicemail box.  
1. Press 7 2 while listening to a message or after the message has finished  
playing.  
2. The system will prompt you to enter the mailbox to which you wish to  
forward the message. You can also use a private or public group  
distribution list at this time.  
See Chapter 5 – Using Group Distributions for more information on  
setting up and using group distribution lists.  
3. After you have made your selection, press 1 to confirm or 2 to change.  
4. Press 1 to send without a comment, or 2 to attach a comment to the  
beginning of the message. You can send the message with normal  
delivery, return receipt and/or priority; see Chapter 3 – Sending  
Messages to learn about these delivery options.  
5. The message is now sent. Press to continue, 2 to send to additional  
*
destinations, or 7 to additional destinations with the same comment.  
68  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Messaging Features  
Erase / Delete and  
Retrieve a Deleted  
Message  
While you are listening to a message, or after a message has finished playing,  
you can delete the message from your inbox or saved box.  
Delete a Message  
Press 3 during or after message playback. The message will be moved to a  
deleted folder.  
Note: You will have a minimum of one day to recover this deleted message;  
some system administrators may extend this recovery period.  
Retrieve a Deleted  
Message  
You may also retrieve a deleted message and move it back into your saved  
messages folder.  
1. Press 6 from the main subscriber’s menu. If you are currently reviewing  
messages press * 6.  
2. You now have three options:  
To listen to your deleted messages, press 1  
To move the message back to your saved messages, press 2  
To delete the message, press 3  
Note: Erasing a message permanently deletes your message from the  
system and you will no longer be able to recover it.  
Number of Messages  
To check how many messages you haves:  
The system can tell you how many new and saved voicemail messages you  
have. If you have fax and email capabilities, the system will also inform you  
how many fax and email messages you have.  
From the Subscriber’s menu, press 1 4 to hear your message count.  
Send A Message  
Directly To A  
Subscriber’s Mailbox  
You can send a message directly to another subscriber’s mailbox from your  
voicemail.  
To record and send a message:  
1. Access your voicemail box.  
You will need the following information:  
Phone number to call the voice messaging system (this may be  
different from inside and outside of the organization)  
Your mailbox number  
Your security code (password)  
2. From the subscriber’s menu, press 2 to record a message.  
3. Press any key when you are done recording.  
Press 2 to review your message before sending  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Messaging Features  
Press 3 to Re-record your message  
Press to cancel without sending  
*
Press 1 to send.  
Press 0 for delivery options such as confidential, urgent or  
message confirmation.  
4. The system will prompt you to enter the mailbox to which you wish to  
send the message. You can also use a private or public group distribution  
list at this time; see Chapter 5 – Using Group Distributions for more  
information on setting up and using group distribution lists.  
5. Press 1 to confirm or 2 to change your entry.  
When sending a message, the system will also provide you with the option to  
send the message with return receipt and/or schedule it for future delivery.  
See this chapter for more information on these options and follow the prompts  
in the system to use these features.  
Note: You can press any key to interrupt the system voice prompt  
explaining how to leave a message.  
To Mark a Message as  
Confidential  
When you mark a message as confidential, you inform the recipient that it is  
confidential before the message plays.  
1. Call the voice messaging system, then press 2 from the subscriber’s  
menu to record a message. Press any key when you are done recording.  
2. Press 0 3 1 to mark your message as confidential.  
3. The system will then ask you to address your message.  
When sending a message as confidential, the system will also provide you  
with the option to send the message with return receipt and/or schedule it for  
future delivery. This chapter contains more information on these options and  
follow the prompts in the system to use the features.  
To Mark a Message as  
Priority  
When you mark a message as priority, it will be sent to the front of the  
subscriber’s message inbox.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 2 from the subscriber’s menu  
to record a message. Press any key when you are done recording.  
2. Press 0 3 2 to send your message as priority.  
3. Address your message.  
When you send a message as priority, you will also be provided with the  
option to send the message with return receipt and/or schedule it for future  
delivery. See this chapter for more information on these options and follow the  
prompts in the system to use these features.  
70  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Messaging Features  
To Mark a Message as  
Priority and  
Confidential  
1. Call the voice messaging system and press 2 from the subscriber’s menu  
to record a message. Press any key after recording.  
2. Press 0 3 4 to send the message as priority and confidential.  
3. Address your message.  
When you send a message as priority and confidential, the system will also  
provide you with the option to send the message with return receipt and/or  
schedule it for future delivery. See this chapter for more information on these  
options and follow the prompts in the system to use these features.  
To Request a Return  
Receipt for a Message  
When sending a message to a subscriber’s inbox you can request a  
confirmation that the recipient received and listened to the message. A  
notification will be delivered to your inbox after the message has been listened  
to.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and press 2 from the subscriber’s menu  
to record a message. Press any key when you are done recording.  
2. Press 0 5 to send your message with return receipt.  
3. Address your message.  
To Request  
Notification of Non-  
receipt  
You can request that the system notify you if a message you send to a  
subscriber is not heard. A notification will be delivered to your inbox if the  
message is not listened to by a date and time that you designate.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and press 2 from the subscriber’s menu  
to record a message. Press any key when you are done recording.  
2. Press 0 6 to send your message with return receipt.  
3. The system will ask you to use your keypad to input a 2-digit month, 2-  
digit date and 4-digit time. The system will confirm the date and time you  
specify.  
4. To confirm and continue sending press 1.  
5. Select the mailbox destination and press 1 to confirm and send.  
To Schedule a  
Message for Future  
Delivery  
You can schedule a message for future delivery with any delivery option  
(normal, priority, confidential, receipt and non-receipt). After you select your  
delivery options and address the message you can send the message  
immediately or mark it for future delivery.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 2 from the subscriber’s menu  
to record a message. Press any key when you are done recording.  
2. Select your delivery option.  
3. Select the mailbox destination and confirm.  
4. Press 2 for future delivery.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Messaging Features  
5. The system will ask you to use your keypad to input a 2-digit month, 2-  
digit date and 4-digit time. The system will confirm the date and time you  
specify.  
6. Press 1 to confirm and send, or 2 to change your delivery time.  
To Send a Message  
Using Directory  
Assistance  
If you do not know a subscriber’s mailbox number you can use directory  
assistance to find it.  
1. From the subscriber’s menu, press 2 to record a message.  
2. Press any key when you are done recording and press 1 to continue.  
3. Follow the voice prompts to select directory assistance. Many  
organizations use 9 but some system administrators change this key  
press.  
72  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Messaging Features  
To Send a Message to  
a Group Distribution  
You can send a message to a group distribution list. This option allows you to  
send a message to multiple individuals without having to enter in individual  
mailbox numbers. For example, if you are a manager, you may wish to set up  
a distribution list that includes your team members.  
You can set up private (personal) group lists while a system manager will set  
up global (public) group lists. See Chapter 5 – Using Group Distributions for  
more information on setting up group distribution lists.  
1. From the subscriber’s menu press 2 to record a message. Press any key  
when you are done recording and press 1 to continue.  
2. Press # to send to a Private Distribution list or # # to send to a global  
Distribution list.  
3. Enter the group number.  
4. Press 1 to confirm or 2 to change your destination.  
5. Press 1 to send.  
Delete a Message  
after Sending  
You have the option of deleting a message from a subscriber’s mailbox if a  
message you sent to the subscriber has not yet been listened to.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 5 from the subscriber’s  
menu.  
2. Enter in the mailbox number you wish to check and the system will play  
the first unheard message you left for the recipient.  
3. To delete the message press 3, to replay the message press 1, to hear  
the next message press 2.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Greetings  
6
Change your  
Personal Greeting  
When you access your mailbox for the first time you will be asked to record your  
personal greeting. You have the option of changing this greeting at any time.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 2 3 from the subscriber’s  
menu to change your greeting. Press any key when you are done recording.  
2. To listen to the greeting you have just recorded press 2, or to activate this  
greeting press 1. To re-record the greeting press 3.  
Deactivate your  
Personal Greeting  
When your personal greeting is deactivated, external callers will hear a standard  
system greeting that includes your recorded name. If you have also deleted your  
recorded name, callers will hear a system standard greeting that includes your  
mailbox number.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 2.  
2. The system will tell you if your greeting is activated or deactivated. If it is  
activated, press 1 to deactivate.  
Listen to your  
Greeting  
Call the voice messaging system and select 3 2 2 from the subscriber’s menu to  
listen to your greeting.  
Change your  
Recorded Name  
When you access your mailbox for the first time you will be asked to record your  
name. This will identify your mailbox to you when you log in, as well as identify  
your mailbox to other internal subscribers. You can re-record your name at any  
time.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and press 3 3 2 from the subscriber’s menu  
to change your recorded name. Press any key when you are done recording.  
2. To listen to your name before saving, press 1  
3. To save your recorded name simply hang up or press to exit.  
*
Delete your  
Recorded Name  
Call the voice messaging system and select 3 3 3 from the subscriber’s menu to  
delete your recorded name.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
IPedge  
Greetings  
Important!  
If you delete your recorded name without re-recording, the  
system will identify your mailbox to internal callers only by its  
mailbox number.  
Activate your  
Temporary Greeting  
(Extended Absence)  
You can set up a temporary greeting which will replace your standard  
personal greeting when activated. A temporary greeting is often used when  
you are out of the office or have specific information to tell a caller, while  
retaining your standard personal greeting for reactivation at a later time.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 8 1 from the subscriber’s  
menu to record your greeting. Press any key when you are done  
recording.  
2. To listen to the greeting you have just recorded press 2, or to activate this  
greeting press 3. To erase and re-record this greeting press 1.  
Deactivate your  
Temporary Greeting  
(Extended Absence)  
Call the voice messaging system and select 8 4 from the subscriber’s menu  
to deactivate your temporary greeting and restore your standard personal  
greeting.  
76  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Other Messaging Applications  
7
Group  
Distributions  
You can send a new message or redirect a message to a group distribution list.  
This option allows you to send a message to multiple individuals without having to  
enter in individual mailbox numbers. For example, if you are a manager you may  
wish to set up a distribution list that includes all members of your team, especially  
if you send them frequent voice messages.  
There are two options for distribution lists: private and global (public). When you  
set up a private group distribution list, only you can access and manage this list. A  
global group distribution list is set up by a system administrator for everyone to  
use, but only the system administrator may add or delete members, delete the list,  
or listen to members of the list.  
Set up a Private  
Group Distribution  
List  
1. From the Subscriber’s menu, enter 3 6 1 to create a new group.  
2. Select a number to save the list under, followed by #. You can select any  
number from 1 to 5 digits.  
3. The system will prompt you to record a list name. The list name will help you  
identify the list in the future. To save the name and continue, press . To listen  
*
to your recorded name, press 1, to re-record press 2, to delete press 3.  
4. After you save the recording you will add members to the list you just created.  
Select prompt 4 and the list number, followed by #.  
5. To add members, press 2  
6. Enter the first mailbox of the person you wish to add. The system will confirm  
the addition.  
7. Continue entering any additional members. Press when finished.  
*
Add Members to a  
Private Group  
Distribution List  
You can add members to a pre-existing distribution list at any time.  
1. From the Subscriber’s menu, enter 3 6 4.  
2. Enter the list number you wish to make changes to, followed by #  
3. To add a new member, press 2 and the new mailbox number. The system will  
confirm the addition.  
4. Continue entering any additional members. Press when finished.  
*
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Other Messaging Applications  
Delete Members from  
a Private Group  
Distribution List  
You can delete members from a pre-existing distribution list at any time.  
1. From the Subscriber’s menu, enter 3 6 4.  
2. Enter the list number you wish to make changes to, followed by #  
3. To delete a member, press 3 and then the mailbox number followed by #.  
The system will confirm the deletion.  
4. Continue entering any additional mailbox numbers you wish to delete.  
Press when finished.  
*
Delete a Private  
Group Distribution  
List  
In addition to deleting individual members from a private group distribution  
list, you can also delete an entire distribution list.  
1. From the Subscriber’s menu, enter 3 6 3.  
2. Enter the list number you wish to delete, followed by #  
3. The system will play the name of the list and prompt you to press # to  
confirm the deletion.  
Listen to Members in  
a Private Group  
Distribution List  
You can listen to a list of members in a distribution list at any time.  
1. From the Subscriber’s menu, enter 3 6 4.  
2. Enter the group list number you wish to listen to, followed by #  
3. Press 1 to listen to a list of the members of the group.  
Using a Private Group  
Distribution List  
You can use a private group distribution list when sending a new message or  
redirecting a received message.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and record a new message or forward a  
received message.  
2. When you address the message for delivery, you have the option of  
inputting a mailbox number or selecting # for a private group distribution  
list.  
3. Enter the group number you wish to use followed by a #  
4. Press 1 to confirm, or 2 to change your entry.  
Using a Global Group  
Distribution List  
You can use a global group distribution list when sending a new message or  
redirecting a received message.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and record a new message or forward a  
received message.  
2. When you address the message for delivery, you have the option of  
inputting a mailbox number or selecting # # for a public distribution list.  
78  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Other Messaging Applications  
3. Enter the group number you wish to use followed by a #  
4. Press 1 to confirm, or 2 to change your entry.  
Personal Options  
Some Personal Options are optional features which may or may not be available  
to your organization. Check with your System Administrator if any of these  
features are available to you.  
Send notification to additional devices when a message is left in your mailbox  
Set a wake-up call  
Change your mailbox password  
Set up your personal assistant  
Forward a call to another phone number using follow-me  
Set up call screening  
Set up do not disturb  
Set up a personal schedule  
Message  
Notification  
Message notification allows you to set up a schedule where you are notified  
through additional devices when new messages are received to your mailbox.  
Examples of message notification include:  
Receiving a text message to your cell phone  
A notification to a pager  
A call-out to another phone number (e.g., home phone)  
Message notification enables you to set a day/time schedule whereby these  
notifications are sent. For example, if you work from home one day a week, you  
may wish to be notified at your home number if a message is left in your office  
mailbox. On the weekends you may still want to know when a new message  
arrives, but only wish to be notified by a text message to your cell phone. Each  
separate notification is set up through a separate “notification Line.”  
Depending on your organization, you may have access to set up message  
notification directly, or your system administrator may need to set up message  
notification for you. Once message notification is set up, you can activate and  
deactivate this feature through your mailbox.  
To Activate or  
Deactivate  
Message  
You can use your phone to activate or deactivate message notification once the  
schedule has been set up.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 1 1. The system will tell you  
Notification  
whether or not your message notification is activated.  
2. If it is not already activated, press 1.  
You may also activate or deactivate individual schedule lines. You will need to  
know the notification schedule each schedule line refers to.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 1 1. The system will tell  
you whether or not your entire message notification is activated.  
2. To activate or deactivate a specific schedule line, press 2.  
3. Enter the schedule line number  
4. The system informs you if this schedule line is activated or deactivated.  
To change, press 1.  
Set a Wake up Call  
You can set a wake up call to ring a phone (for example, your cell phone) at a  
specific time during the day. The wake-up ring will repeat everyday until you  
turn it off.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 1 3  
2. To set a weekday wake-up call, press 1; to set a weekend wake-up call  
press 2  
3. The system will tell you whether wake up call is activated or deactivated.  
To change, press 1.  
4. Once the wake-up call is activated, select 2 1 to enter in a time when you  
would like to receive the call.  
5. Enter in a 4-digit time followed by a for AM or # for PM.  
*
6. The system will confirm the wake up time.  
7. Set up the call-out number. This is the number the system will ring at your  
scheduled time. Press 3 and the system will inform you if there is already  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
a call-out number saved (this allows you to reuse a number without  
having to enter it every time you set up a wake up call). To change the  
call-out number press 1.  
8. Enter the phone number followed by #  
9. The system will confirm the number.  
Change your Mailbox  
Password  
Your mailbox password is initially set when you access your mailbox for the  
first time and complete the mailbox setup process. However, you can change  
your mailbox password at any time.  
To change your mailbox password:  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 4 1  
2. Enter a new password  
3. The system will ask you to confirm the password.  
You can also delete your mailbox password without entering a new one:  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 4 2  
2. The system will ask you to press # to confirm deletion  
Important!  
If you delete your mailbox password your mailbox will not be  
password-protected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Other Messaging Applications  
Personal Assistant  
With Personal Assistant you can designate buttons that callers can press  
when listening to your voicemail message that will automatically transfer them  
to another extension. For example, you may wish to inform callers they can  
reach your assistant by pressing a number on their keypad.  
A Personal Assistant must first be set up by your system administrator to  
define the key press. Once the key press is set up you can change the  
transfer extension through your phone. Check with your system administrator  
to see if any keys are pre-defined in your organization.  
To change your Personal Assistant transfer extension:  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 7 2  
2. Enter the mailbox of the person you wish the call to be transferred to,  
followed by #.  
3. Change your personal message greeting (see Chapter 4 – Greetings) to  
indicate to the caller that they can use this key press. For example, “Press  
1 to be transferred to my assistant.”  
Follow me  
Follow-me enables you to set up your mailbox to forward a call to another  
phone number before the call is transferred to your voicemail. For example,  
you may be out of the office but are expecting an important call and want all  
calls to be transferred to your cell phone.  
Follow-me is an optional feature that may or may not be available in your  
organization and depending on how it is set up can also allow you to:  
Accept a call or reject it and send it to voicemail  
Record the conversation once the call is accepted  
Conference in the operator and stay on the call or drop out  
Conference in another extension and stay on the call or drop out  
Setting up Follow  
me  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 1 2 2 from the  
subscriber’s menu.  
2. Enter a phone number (the call-out number), followed by #, the system  
will then repeat the number back for confirmation.  
3. To activate this call-out number, press 1 or to enter a new call-out  
number, press 2.  
Once the call-out number is activated, all calls stop ringing at your office  
phone and will automatically be forwarded to your call-out number.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Other Messaging Applications  
Accepting or  
rejecting calls at a  
call-out  
Once a call rings through to your call-out number you have the option of  
accepting or rejecting the call.  
1. Once the Follow me has been set up and a call is redirected to your call-  
out number and you answer the phone, you will hear a message that  
indicates you are receiving a transferred call from the voicemail system.  
2. Press # to accept the call or to reject the call and send it to voicemail.  
*
Transfering to an  
Operator or  
another Extension  
If available in your organization, you can transfer to an operator or to another  
extension once you accept a transferred call.  
1. Once the Follow me has been set up and a call is redirected to your call-  
out number and you answer the phone, you will hear a message that  
indicates you are receiving a forwarded call from the voicemail system.  
2. Press # to accept the call.  
3. At any time during the conversation, press # again to trigger the call  
options. You can press 0 for the operator or # and another extension  
number, then hang up.  
Setting up Call  
Screening  
When call screening is set up, a caller is asked to state their name before the  
call is transferred to your extension. You then have the opportunity to accept  
the call or send it to voicemail. If call screening is available in your  
organization, you may activate or deactivate it through your phone.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 5.  
2. The system informs you if call screening is activated or deactivated.  
3. To change, press 1.  
Setting up “Do not  
Disturb”  
You can have calls sent directly to your voicemail when you do not want your  
office phone to ring.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 4 1  
2. To deactivate and have calls transferred back to your phone, press 1  
again.  
82  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Other Messaging Applications  
Setting up a Personal  
Schedule  
The personal schedule allows you to manage calls according to a schedule  
you define. With the personal schedule you can:  
Route a call to one or multiple destinations based on caller ID, time, or a  
combination of the two.  
Play different greetings based on caller ID, time, or a combination of the  
two.  
Set up alternate dialing menus (allows callers to press digits on the  
keypad during your message to be transferred to a personal assistant or  
other extension/phone number, skip the greeting, replay the greeting or  
page you).  
For example, when on a business trip you want your cell phone and a  
colleague’s office phone to ring when a call comes into your extension. If  
voice mail picks up, you want an alternate greeting played that tells callers  
you are out of the office, but directs them to press 1 to reach an operator, 2 to  
leave a voicemail, and 3 to ring a different colleague’s extension.  
Recording a  
Scheduled Greeting  
Your personal schedule is set up your system administrator, however your  
messages are recorded through your voicemail box.  
1. Call the voice messaging system and select 3 8  
2. Select a greeting number on your keypad between 1 and 9  
3. To listen to the greeting select 2; to record a greeting select 3  
Unified Messaging  
If Unified Messaging is available in your organization, you will be able to  
access all of your voice and fax messages directly through your email inbox.  
You can listen to your voice messages with any audio player and fax  
messages can be viewed with a standard image viewer. The subject line of  
voice and fax messages will include caller ID; voice messages will include the  
duration of voicemail (in seconds), while faxes will show fax sender and  
number of pages.  
Access your  
Voicemails through  
Email  
If Unified Messaging is available in your organization all of your voicemails will  
be accessible through your email inbox. Each time you receive a voicemail an  
email will be sent to your inbox with an attachment that includes a recording of  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Other Messaging Applications  
the voicemail. You can open this attachment with any audio player installed  
on your computer to listen to the recording or on your telephone as shown  
below.  
Click the “Link to message” to play your message using the telephone. The  
following options display. Click on the appropriate button.  
84  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call Manager Basics  
8
The IPedge Call Manager works with Net Server to provide a powerful "PC-  
Phone" to enhance productivity for telephone users.  
The Call Manager is designed to run on a PC with Microsoft® Windows XP,  
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows 7  
operating systems connected to a standard TCP/IP network with the Net Server.  
The Net Server must be installed with the proper software license(s) for Call  
Manager to operate correctly. Call Manager will operate in Demo Mode if the  
appropriate licenses are unavailable. Demo mode lets you use the software for  
Demonstration purposes only for a limited period of time.  
There are two levels of IPedge Call Manager:  
Call Manager Standard version is free to all users of the IPedge system. The  
license (I-CM-STD1) for Call Manager Standard is included in the user license  
bundle at no additional charge.  
Call Manager Advanced version provides enhanced functionality, including full  
Unified Communications (UC). Purchase Call Manager Advanced license  
(I-CM-1) when full UC capabilities are required.  
Note: All Call Manager user features are described. They may or may not work  
depending on the license.  
Call Manager provides the following major functions:  
It allows you to place, answer, handle, view, and manage phone calls using  
your computer screen, keyboard, and mouse.  
Using the VoIP Audio capabilities can provide a complete speech path when  
using a PC with the proper speech component support.  
Rules and actions can be set up to automatically activate when calls arrive  
even while you are away.  
It can easily interface with many popular programs (like Microsoft Outlook,  
Goldmine, ACT, etc.). This allows you to dial from and “screen-pop” into these  
programs or the Internet / Intranet.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Call Manager Basics  
The Main Screen  
This section gives an overview of the main user interface of the Call Manager,  
including the buttons, displays, and indicators, which allow you to easily and  
efficiently operate your phone. Call Manager provides two views, Compact  
and Expanded, allowing you to operate using only the space on your screen  
that you want.  
Note: You can easily change the color scheme of your Call Manager by  
clicking drop down next to the Set the color scheme icon. The color  
options are Blue, Silver or Black.  
The Compact View  
In “Compact” view Call Manager consumes minimal screen space but still  
provides the user with indictors, information, and buttons to effectively  
operate the phone. This view is most effective when users handle one call at  
a time, or have very little available screen space. Below is a sample view and  
information about the various parts of Call Manager.  
Main Menu  
Button  
Expand Button  
Companion Application tabs  
Note: The button information below is independent of the compact or  
expanded view. However, the buttons that are visible in the compact  
view are explained first and the additional buttons are explained in  
the Expanded view section.  
Button / Icon  
Main Menu  
Description  
Click this button to access Call Manager configuration  
menus and Help.  
Minimize Button  
Hides Call Manager into the system tray. Double-  
click on the Call Manager icon (shown right) in the  
system tray to return the Call Manager to the  
screen.  
Maximize Button  
Used to change the phone to/from its “Compact” view and  
its “Expanded” view.  
86  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Call Manager Basics  
Button / Icon  
Description  
Tabs – Home, Actions, The tabs control various functions and settings.  
Preferences, Tools  
Home – has some of the basic telephone functions,  
such as Make Call, Answer, Hold, Transfer, Hangup,  
Forward, DND On/Off.  
Actions – contains the tools to create, copy, edit/test,  
and delete user defined actions.  
Preferences – contains General configuration, Hot  
Keys, Dialing, and Docking. It also has tab settings,  
such as Add, Update, Delete, and Revert.  
Tools – contains calls and events information.  
Icons on the Right  
(L to R): Toggles compact and expanded mode, color  
scheme, voice message indicator, open personal call han-  
dler. These functions are explained below or in other  
chapters.  
Information LCD Dis-  
play  
This window simulates a phone LCD and provides differ-  
ent types of information depending on current status. If  
your phone is idle, it shows the date/time, Extension num-  
ber, and current Name. While a call is active on your  
phone it shows information about the call – Duration, Call-  
erID or Name (if present.) When a call is active in the win-  
dow, right-click on the LCD to access to popup a menu of  
call control options.  
Message Wait-  
ing Indicator  
This indicator blinks a Red light above the envelop icon  
(shown left) when you have messages waiting.  
Side Window Rollout  
Button  
Press this button to show a side window that has addi-  
tional programmable buttons.  
CompanionApplication A number of optional companion programs can be config-  
tabs  
ured to add significant functionality to the Call Manager.  
Each Companion Application is docked in the pane at the  
bottom of Call Manager to provide easy access to the fea-  
tures/functions of the application.  
Home Phone tab  
The first four keys allow you to (from left to right) Answer,  
Hold, Transfer, and Hang up a call. Should you forget, you  
can hover your mouse over a key to be reminded what  
function a key performs.  
Do-Not-Disturb Key  
and Indicator  
Displays the current Do Not Disturb status of your phone.  
Hover the mouse over this area to see the current DND  
status message. Click to change your DND status and  
message.  
Call Forward Key and  
Indicator  
Displays the current “PBX call forwarding” status for your  
phone. Hover the mouse over this area to see the entire  
FWD status. Click to change your PBX forwarding status  
and destination.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Call Manager Basics  
Button / Icon  
Dial Pad Button  
Description  
Click the dial pad button to expose and  
hide the popup Dial Pad. Use the Dial  
Pad when you reach a recording that  
says “...Press 1 for sales, 2 for sup-  
port,...”. When this dial pad is displayed  
you can use your mouse to click the dig-  
its to dial or use the number keys or  
NumLock keypad on your computer  
keyboard to dial digits.  
Make Call Button  
Click the Make Call button to dial the number shown in the  
Dial Buffer.  
Dial Buffer and Redial Type a number into this space and press Enter or click the  
Selection  
“Dial” button to the left of the box. Click the drop-down  
arrow to view the last 10 outside phone numbers you  
dialed. Select a number from the drop-down and press  
Enter or click Dial to redial that number. You can even  
Copy/Paste phone numbers from other programs into this  
window to dial. You may also include letters in the dial  
number – Call Manager automatically converts the letters  
to the matching numbers on the telephone keypad (i.e. 1-  
800-IFLYSWA).  
Volume Controls  
Audio Control  
These buttons control the volume when the VoIP audio  
interface is used.  
The audio control is your line button with a status indicator  
for that line when using the VoIP audio interface. Right  
click the button to see the Audio Configuration menu.  
Recording Button &  
Indicator  
The indicator light works in conjunction with OAISYS  
Tracer and OAISYS Auto Call Record. Users with appro-  
priate permissions will have this indicator on their Call  
Manager. If the light is red, this means the user’s call is  
currently being recorded. If the light is gray, it is not being  
recorded. The user can click on this button and select  
‘Start Recording’ to initiate recording of the call. If the call  
is being recorded the user can click on the button to termi-  
nate the recording.  
A number of shortcut keys allow you to use the keyboard in place of the  
mouse to control Call Manager. The list of Shortcut keys can be found using  
the menu selection Setup>Shortcut Keys. Note: The F1 key is the HELP key  
a can be pressed at any time to access the Help document.  
88  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Call Manager Basics  
Expanded View  
In “Expanded” view the Call Manager is enlarged beyond the compact view to  
provide the user with additional buttons, indictors, information to manage multiple  
simultaneous calls and to access many other features. The follow describes the  
additional items in the “Expanded” view.  
Streamline Button – Used to change Call Manager back to its “Compact” view.  
Calls Window – This window displays that status and associated information  
for each active phone call on the phone. Thus you can easily view and  
manage multiple phone calls. Right click the mouse on any call to view a  
menu of options for handling the call (like Hold, Transfer to Voice Mail, Hang  
Up, etc.).  
Call Info Indicators – on the right side of the Call Window is a “Call Info  
Indicator” that indicates if Extra call information is attached to a call. A gray  
notebook icon means no information is attached, a blue notebook icon means  
standard information is attached, and a red notebook icon indicates priority  
information is attached to the call. Press the Call Notes icon to view or change  
Notes information on the call. Notes are retained with the call even when you  
transfer it to another person. You may use Call Notes with an IVR to attach a  
Customer Name, Credit Card Number, and Zip Code to the call before you  
answer, saving you from asking the caller for this information.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Call Manager Basics  
Programmable Buttons – A number of keys can be easily configured by  
the user as “Feature” keys, “Speed Dial” keys, “Call” keys, “User Action”  
keys, etc. To change one of these keys simply Right-click the mouse over  
the key and use the Setup Key window to configure the settings for the  
key.  
ACD Buttons – ACD keys are programmable buttons that would give  
ACD agents easy login/logout of ACD groups. These keys also display  
the current ACD agent status, and allow agents to control their Wrap-Up  
mode.  
Screen Docked  
Call Manager provides a screen-docking feature where the Call Manager can  
dock to the top or bottom of your PC screen. When screen docked the Call  
Manager takes on a very low profile using only a small portion of the screen,  
and stays accessible even when other applications are maximized. This  
allows user’s to access the features of Call Manager while consuming a  
minimal amount of PC screen space as shown below. This is not the default,  
the default docked profile is the regular expanded view.  
Views  
Screen-docked profile  
Most of the phone display, buttons, and controls that appear on each screen-  
docking profile can be chosen by the user from the “Docking Tab” in Call  
Manager Preferences.  
Call Manager Main  
Menu  
To reach Call Managers Main Menu, click on the SCM icon/menu in the upper  
left-hand corner. The Main Menu opens as shown below:  
The Main menu screen menu item expands into an ability to Change the  
Login settings, an ability to reset the phone to its default settings, access help,  
and check the Call Manager version and serial number.  
90  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
Call Manager Basics  
Shortcuts  
You can use the Quick Access Toolbar or KeyTips to execute various commands.  
The QAT and KeyTips available in SCM are explained below.  
Quick Access  
Toolbar (QAT)  
The QAT (shown below) consists of frequently used tools that can be added to the  
top of the screen for easy access. You can add as many tools as you like. If there  
are too many to fit on your bar, the remaining ones will go into overflow.  
In Compact mode the Answer, Hang up, and Dial Box tools are always available in  
the QAT. These three cannot be removed, but more tools can be added. However,  
you can change this configuration in Compact/Docked mode if you wish.  
Compact Mode  
Quick Access Toolbar  
Regular Mode  
To add tools to the QAT, right click on an icon, then select “Add to Quick Access  
Toolbar.” To remove a tool from the QAT, right click on the icon, then select  
“Remove from Quick Access Toolbar.”  
Note: Any pop up menu tools, such as Companion docking and color schemes  
cannot be added to the QAT.  
KeyTips  
KeyTips allow for easier keyboard navigation. Each tool on the Ribbon has a  
KeyTip assigned to it which you can navigate with using your keyboard. To begin,  
press Alt. Small boxes with letters inside appear over various tools on the ribbon.  
To use that tool, press the letter. For example, press 'Alt + C' to use the  
“Compact” button.  
If the tool is a container-type tool (such as a Ribbon Tab, Drop-down menu, or the  
Application menu), pressing the associated KeyTip will show the KeyTips of tools  
in that container. From there, you can press another KeyTip to use a tool in that  
container, or press Escape to return “up” one level, showing the keytips from  
before. For example, press 'Alt + A' to transfer to the Actions ribbon tab, then  
press 'N' to launch the New Action dialog box.  
Note: If you want a tool to be available without having to navigate the ribbon,  
you can add it to the Quick Access Toolbar. Tools on the QAT respond to  
Alt+1, Alt+2, etc.  
Hot Keys  
SCM also has “Hot Keys” for dialing and popping up (to quickly answer calls),  
which can be set in Preferences > Hot Keys.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Call Manager Basics  
The Side Window  
Screen  
Click the “Side Window” button on the main screen to cause the side window  
to appear just to the right side of the main window or below when the main  
window is docked. The side window provides access to the Personal Call  
Handler window and additional programmable buttons can also be reached.  
This window is docked to the side of the main window. You can move the side  
window around the screen, but whenever the main window is moved the side  
window will move with it. And likewise whenever the main window is  
minimized (into the system tray) or restored, the side window will move with it.  
Call Handler Mode  
Call Handler Management Buttons – Used to Add, Change, or Delete  
Personal Call Handler rules.  
Close Button – Use to close the Call Handler window.  
Call Handler Rules Window – Displays the current Call Handler rules  
along with an enabled (checked) and disabled (unchecked) box per rule.  
The triggering event is show in blue text while the action to take place is  
shown in red text for easier viewing.  
Buttons tab – Use to switch the window from the “Call Handler” mode to  
the “Buttons” mode.  
Buttons Mode  
Below is a sample view of the side window screen in Buttons mode, which  
provides 25 user-programmable buttons for the user.  
User Programmable Buttons – A number of keys can be easily configured  
by the user as Feature keys, Speed Dial keys, Call keys, User Action  
keys, ACD keys, etc.  
92  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
IPedge  
Call Manager Basics  
Companion  
Application  
Windows  
Companion Application tabs open as the result of clicking one of the Call Manager  
tabs. These windows open docked (connected) to the main window or can be  
undocked (moved away) from the main window. (Each side must be enabled in  
the “preferences/docking” drop down list). While a companion window is docked  
with the main window, whenever the main window is moved the companion  
window will move with it. And likewise whenever the main window is minimized  
(into the system tray) or restored, the companion window(s) moves with it.  
When companion windows are undocked, they float separately from  
the main window and can be moved and resized separately. Use the  
Fly out / Fly in icon (shown right) to dock and undock companion  
applications.  
All companion applications can dock to the top, bottom, left or right side of the  
desktop. When docked, the companion applications can be arranged in various  
configurations (vertically, horizontally, pinned, unpinned). To dock a Companion  
Application window to one of these edges, first undock the window from the main  
window. Then, drag the companion application window until one edge overlaps  
the screen's edge. When you release the mouse, the application will dock to that  
edge.  
You can drag multiple application windows to the same edge to place them in a  
shared dock. This will allow you to resize each window by dragging the splitter  
bars, or move it to a different position in the dock by dragging the application  
titlebar to various interior edges of the dock. The More Buttons companion  
application changes configuration to show in a single vertical column when  
docked, to allow a thin docked area which preserves screen area.  
Screen Colors  
The Call Manager has three color schemes. To change the color of your display,  
click the Color drop down and select either Blue, Silver or Black.  
Color icon  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Call Manager Features  
9
This chapter defines how to use the IPedge features using Call Manager.  
Features included are Call Handling, system, Call Center, and Microsoft Outlook  
features. Personal Call Handler (PCH) rules can be created to respond and take  
actions on calls automatically, or Programmable Buttons can be used for even  
easier access to many features.  
Call Handling  
Features  
Call Handling features include how to dial, answer, hold, transfer and hang up  
calls. It also includes how to view the Extra Call Information when attached to a  
call.  
Making Outgoing  
Calls  
Call Manager supports a number of ways to place calls including open  
architecture links to other programs or contact managers, which can also be used  
to dial calls. The following are some of the typical ways to place a call using Call  
Manager. Most of these functions are found on the Call Manager Home tab.  
Manual On-screen Dialing  
1. Click within the dial number box and enter the number from the keyboard  
(shown below).  
2. Press Enter when done to start the number to be dialed.  
Dial Number Box  
Re-dial a Recently Used Number  
1. Pull down the list of numbers in the dial number box and select the number to  
dial.  
2. Click the Make Call button to dial.  
Using Call Manager Dialpad  
1. Click the dialpad button  
to expose the dialpad.  
2. Enter the number to be dialed including a trunk access code; the call will  
proceed automatically once a valid number is entered.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
IPedge  
Using Call Manager Features  
Hot Key Dialing  
1. Highlight a telephone number in another application.  
2. Using the keyboard, press the key combination assigned for Hot Key  
Dialing. The call will proceed dialing the number highlighted.  
Using Drag and Drop  
Use the mouse to drag and drop a call from either the Call History or  
Contacts tab list into the LCD Display window. The call will proceed to  
dial.  
Using Contacts / Personal Speed Dial List  
1. Click the Contacts Companion tab to open the contacts page, and  
navigate to a Directory or Group.  
2. Make a selection from the listing and double-click the name to proceed  
dialing.  
or right-click on the selected name and choose Call Now to proceed.  
Using Call History to Re-dial a Number  
1. Click the History Companion tab.  
2. Scan the list for a recently dialed number or look for a number of  
someone that called you.  
3. Right-click on the line with the person to call and select Call Now  
or double-click on the line with the person to call.  
Using Speed Dial User Button  
Click on a User Programmable button that has been programmed as a  
Speed Dial button. The call will proceed immediately.  
Answering Calls  
Typically the longest ringing calls are answered first, but calls can be  
answered in any order with a click of the button.  
To Answer Oldest Call  
While a call is ringing, click the Answer button.  
or double-click on the top call in the Calls View Window.  
or press the Answer Hot Key (F9).  
Note: Call Manager must have focus for the key to work.  
To Answer Calls in Any Order  
Double-click on the selected call in the Calls View Window.  
To Answer a Call while Talking (Call Waiting)  
While on an existing conversation, another call may ring. The existing call  
can be placed on hold and the ringing call answered.  
While talking on an existing call and another call rings in (not marked  
“Campon”), click the Answer button  
or double-click on the ringing call in the Calls View Window  
96  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Using Call Manager Features  
or press the Answer Hot Key (F9).  
Note: Call Manager must have focus for the key to work.  
Hang Up  
Hanging Up or Disconnecting Calls  
When the call is completed, click the hangup button to disconnect the call  
or right-click on the call in the Call View Window and select  
Hangup.  
or press the Hangup Hot Key (F12). Note: Call Manager must have focus for the  
key to work.  
Holding Calls  
To Place Call on Hold  
While talking with a caller, click the hold button to place call on  
hold  
or right-click on the call in the Call View Window and select Hold  
from the menu.  
To Retrieve Call  
To re-connect a held call, click the hold button again  
or press the answer button.  
or double-click on the held call in the Call View Window  
or right-click on the held call and select Answer from the menu.  
Transferring  
Calls  
Using Transfer Button  
1. While talking with a caller, click the transfer button to get  
intercom dial tone  
or right-click on the call in the Call View Window and select Transfer.  
2. Using the keyboard enter the number to transfer the caller to, press Enter  
when done.  
or use the on-screen dial pad and dial the number. Once the system recognizes a  
valid number, the call will proceed automatically.  
Using Drag and Drop  
While talking with a caller, use the mouse to drag and drop the call from the  
Calls Window onto a DSS button for immediate transfer to another station.  
or use the mouse to drag and drop the call from the LCD display window onto a  
DSS button for immediate transfer to another station.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
Using Call Manager Features  
Call Forwarding  
To Set Call Forwarding  
1. Click the FWD Off button.  
2. Choose a Forwarding type from the pull-down listing  
(shown below).  
3. Enter a Destination for the forwarded calls.  
4. Click Save to compete the setting.  
To Clear Call Forwarding  
1. Click the.  
button  
2. Choose <None> from the pull-down listing.  
3. Click Save to remove the previous setting.  
98  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Using Call Manager Features  
Status Messages  
and DND  
Status messages is available under the DND Off option.  
Setting a Status Message  
1. Click the  
button to bring up the Set Status Message window.  
The following screen displays.  
2. Change the selection to Status Msg Only On  
3. Use the pull down listing and select a Status Message.  
4. When needed enter additional information on the Custom 2nd Line.  
5. Click the Save button when done. The status message will appear on the  
DSS keys throughout the system.  
Turning Off DND or Message Only  
1. Click the  
button to bring up the or Status Message window.  
2. Click the Msg Off radio button to remove the Status Message.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Call Manager Features  
Viewing Extra Call  
Information  
Call Manager has the ability to attach, retain, and display extra information  
taken on a call. This could include information input by an IVR, added/  
attached information by the Call Router, attached from a database, or added  
by any user who handled the call. This information is retained with the call as  
it is transferred about in the phone system. The following Call Info icons are  
displayed in the Calls window or LCD Display to indicate the presence of  
additional information. The icon changes color depending upon the  
information available:  
– No call information attached to this call.  
– Normal call information attached to this call.  
– At least one field of priority call information is attached.  
To View Call Information  
Right click the “Call Info” icon  
on the right side of the Call key for the  
desired call. This window can contain many different fields depending on your  
configuration and the call information attached. Note: These windows can  
automatically popup whenever a new call arrives by using the Popup Call Info  
Screen action in the Personal Call Handler.  
To Add or Change Information  
1. With the “Call Info” window open, place the cursor into the box to be  
changed and use the keyboard to add or erase information.  
Note: The ability to add or change information is controlled by Preferences  
> General > Extra Info settings.  
2. Click the Update button to save the new information. Once changed,  
other programs will use this information. For example, the call is being  
screened and transferred into an ACD queue; the caller could define a  
Preferred Agent by entering an agent’s ID into the Preferred Agent  
Information field. When the call is transferred this information is available  
to be used by the ACD application.  
100  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Using Call Manager Features  
To Copy Call Information to Another Application  
With the “Call Info” window open, click the Copy button to place that specific  
information on the Windows clipboard for pasting into another program. For  
example, the user may need to use the Customer number to look up the status of  
an order. Clicking Copy and switching to the other program and pasting into the  
appropriate field allows for a fast lookup.  
Call Center  
Features  
The ACD actions can be used to Log In / Log Out to/from ACD groups. Going  
temporarily unavailable and an ability to end wrap times can be part of the  
features available. Additional Call Center features are possible using User  
Programmable buttons.  
Logging In or  
Out  
Click the ACD Login button to open the ACD Login/Logout window.  
Note: The right list box shows available groups for the identified agent number.  
The left list box shows groups currently logged into.  
To Log Into or Out Of one or more groups  
1. Highlight the group name(s) in the right-hand box and click <<Log In. If your  
Agent ID is listed as a Supervisor, then the Supervisor: Take Calls check box  
will be offered on your screen. Placing a check in this box will log you in to  
take calls for the group(s) selected when <<Log In was pressed.  
2. Click Done when finished.  
3. The ACD Key will display the number of ACD groups the extension is logged  
into and the total number of ACD groups you are a member.  
To Log Out  
1. Highlight the group name(s) in the left-hand box and click the >>Log Out  
button.  
2. Click Done when finished.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Using Call Manager Features  
Changing Agent  
Status  
1. Click the ACD Status button. The following ACD Agent Status window will  
appear:  
To Make Agent Unavailable  
1. Use pull-down list and choose a reason.  
2. Click the Make Unavailable button.  
3. Click Done.  
To Make Agent Available  
1. Click the Make Available button.  
2. Click Done.  
To Set the ACD Status to Wrap-up  
1. Click Set WrapUp button.  
2. Click Done.  
Note: The Set WrapUp button is NOT available on all installations.  
To End WrapUp  
1. Click the ACD Status button.  
2. Click the End WrapUp button.  
3. Click Done.  
102  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Preferences  
10  
PREFERENCES  
This section defines settings that are available to the user and can be changed to  
meet their needs. A number of additional settings are available for the System  
Administrator for setting more advanced features such as controlling access to  
some features, creating a server-based rules and configurations. This section will  
concentrate on the settings readily available to the user.  
These settings are arranged under the Preferences tab (shown below), Hot Keys,  
dialing options, docking, and tabs settings. Each of these sections will define the  
settings and how to change these settings to match your needs.  
Config Settings  
Preferences has a number of settings for making Call Manager work and look the  
way you choose. To access Preferences click on Preferences tab. The settings in  
Preferences are divided between four tabs each defined below.  
Note: Depending on your configuration you may not be able to change the  
Preferences, in which case you should check with your System  
Administrator.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Preferences  
General  
These settings control how Call Manager interacts with other Windows-based  
programs and how it should react when calls ring or are being dialed. Extra  
Call Information can be enabled and content to be displayed defined as well  
as details for Microsoft Outlook Integration when used.  
User Preferences  
Pop Up on Call Ringing – Check this option if you'd like your Call  
Manager to automatically pop up when a call rings on your phone.  
Pop Up on Call being Dialed – Check this option if you'd like your Call  
Manager to automatically pop up whenever a call is being dialed from  
another program (via TAPI or DDE dialing) or dialed via Hot Key dialing.  
Always on Top – Use this option to keep Call Manager on top of all other  
programs. This makes it easily accessible.  
Low Profile – Enabling this option makes the Call Manager very thin in the  
“Streamlined Mode” by eliminating the Option Buttons on the bottom of  
the screen.  
Mobile User – some users travel with a laptop PC from desktop to  
desktop each time using the Call Manager with a different PBX extension.  
This Mobile User option will pop up a “Login” screen each time Call  
Manager is started so that they can log into the appropriate PBX phone  
extension.  
Disable Ribbon Key Tips – When this box is unchecked, pressing ALT  
while using Call Manager will popup the ribbon KeyTips, which allow you  
to access any tool with a few keystrokes. When checked, KeyTips will be  
disabled, allowing you to use the ALT key without them popping up.  
Call History  
Enable Call Logging – To have Call Manager collect and display Call  
History, Call Logging must be enabled.  
104  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
IPedge  
Preferences  
Call Types  
Once Call Logging is enabled, a choice needs to be made to log All, Intercom  
Only, or Outside Only calls.  
Sound File – Enter the path to the .WAV file to be played. Use the Browse  
button when needed to search for the path to the sound file.  
Audible Message  
Waiting  
An audible sound can be played when the Message Waiting indication turns on.  
The sound played can be any .WAV file of your choosing.  
Enable Sound – Placing a check mark in the box enables playing a sound in  
the file shown. Clicking the Test button will allow you to listen to the sound  
selected.  
Extra Info Screen  
Each call may have additional information attached to the call that may be useful.  
The Configuration button in the window accesses the screen for enabling this  
feature as well as choosing the extra information items to be displayed along with  
their properties shown below. With the Extra Info Feature enabled, this symbol  
appears with each call. When the symbol is gray, no information is present, when  
cyan, information is attached and when red, high priority information is available.  
Extra Info Feature – Provides for enabling or disabling this feature. When  
disabled, the Call Information icon will not appear with each call.  
Static Information Fields – These fields will have a fixed area within the Call  
Notes window for the information to be displayed. You have the ability to Add,  
Change an existing or Remove any field.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
Preferences  
To Add or Change a Static Info Field:  
Field Name – Select from the pre-defined list of fields or create you own  
field name. This name must match exactly the information field where the  
information is held.  
Description – Enter any description you desire to mark this field.  
Field Type – Each field can be selected to be either a fixed parameter (1  
line) or long text (multiple lines) fields.  
Priority – The field priority selected will mark the color of the icon attached  
to the call.  
User Can Edit Field – This determines if this field can be changed or  
fixed.  
Action Button – A button can be defined to use trigger user defined  
Action. The Action Name must match exactly the name of the Action  
defined in User Defined Actions.  
Dynamic Info Fields – Allows the choice of when these fields will show.  
provides a large set of fields, which are automatically filled in based upon  
the call information. Dynamic fields are fields set by another application  
and are not pre-defined in.  
MS Outlook Integration  
Call Manager is specifically designed to work in harmony with Microsoft's  
Outlook contact management program.  
Initial Setup – Click the Configuration button to reach the Outlook  
Preferences screen with the following options:  
Enable Outlook Integration – This main option enables/disables the  
Outlook Integration features. This must be checked for any Outlook  
features to work. If you're not using Outlook, then this should be disabled.  
106  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Preferences  
Home Area Code – Enter your home area code. This is used for dialing local  
calls when the area code needs to be stripped from the dialing.  
On Manual Dialing – Lookup In Outlook – When enabled, whenever you dial a  
phone number manually, the phone number will be looked up in Outlook to  
see if there is a match. If there is an exact match (only one Contact entry  
matches) the name and account number from the Contact will be  
automatically attached to the call. Typically this should always be enabled.  
Automatically Open a CONTACT for each Call – When enabled, whenever  
you dial a phone number that matches an Outlook Contact, that contact will be  
popped only – sometimes referred to as “Reverse Screen-Pop”.  
Add New Contact if No Match Found – When enabled, if no contact matches  
this phone number, a “New” contact in Outlook will automatically pop up.  
Automatically Open a JOURNAL for each Call – Using Outlook Journal entry  
makes it convenient to keep track of phone calls made (or received) and to  
takes notes while on a call. By enabling this option a New Journal entry will  
be popped open whenever you make a call. Also, if the phone number exactly  
matches an Outlook Contact, then this new Journal entry will be automatically  
“associated” with that Contact.  
Automatically View the Contact’s Web Page – When enabled, if the contact  
record contains a Web address for the caller, this web page will pop up within  
the browser.  
Incoming Screen-Pop – Use the Personal Call Handler feature to perform  
Outlook Screen Pops!  
Calendar – Enable appointment and reminder events from Outlook Calendar.  
Outlook Phone Link – With the Outlook Link application installed, click the  
Setup button to access the Setup Configuration for Outlook Link. For details  
on setting up Outlook Link see the Application Note “Screen Pop Outlook”.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Preferences  
Dialing Tab  
Click Preferences > Dialing or Preferences > General > Dialing tab. Use this  
tab to determine whether to follow a Server-based dial plan, use a dial plan  
defined for your station, or dial all the codes yourself. The last option is not  
practical when using a database or using “hot key” dialing since other  
applications don’t know what is a valid number to dial including entering a  
trunk access code when needed. If your System Administrator has set up the  
Server-based Dial Plan, this is the best choice and will save you a lot of time.  
Local Dialing Plan  
Trunk Access Code – This must be set to the access code you need to  
dial to get an outside line or trunk. Making outside calls using “Speed Dial”  
keys or dialing from another program, a Trunk Access Code will  
automatically be dialed to access a trunk before dialing the phone  
number.  
Home Area Code – Your local area code should be defined here. This is  
used only when you choose to use the Local Dial Plan.  
108  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Preferences  
Dialing Outside  
Numbers  
Dial same as User Dialed – With this option selected, outside phone numbers  
will be dialed exactly how the user dialed them (unchanged by Call Manager).  
Use Local Dial Plan – When this option is selected, the user dials an outside  
phone number, the number will be analyzed according the dial plan and the  
number will be automatically modified (add “1+” for Long distance, etc) before  
Call Manager dials it. Use the Change Plan button to view and/or change the  
settings of the dial plan.  
Use SERVER Dial Plan – When this option is selected, the dial plan that is  
configured on the NET Server will be used as the dial plan. You can press the  
Check Plan button to bring up the Server Dial Plan Tester screen that allows  
you to enter a Test Phone Number and see how it will be dialed. It is the  
responsibility of the System Administrator to setup and maintain the server  
dial plan.  
Dialer  
When the Dialer option is installed, two action buttons can be defined for use with  
the Dialer. These user-defined buttons can appear on both the Ready to Dial and  
the Results screens used with the Dialer.  
Ready to Dial – Enable the Action button and select the Action to be  
performed when the button is pressed. Optionally, the label can be changed to  
meet your needs.  
Call Results – Enable the Action button and select the Action to be performed  
when the button is pressed. Optionally, the label can be changed to meet your  
needs.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Preferences  
Defining a Local Dialing  
Plan  
Each area of the US uses a different set of rules for determining which calls  
are local calls or long distance. For your area, a good source for determining  
how to define your dialing plan, use the opening pages of your phone book.  
These pages generally define how to dial different areas and provide a listing  
of prefix codes for the local calling areas. Three typical examples are:  
1. Phoenix, AZ – all calls within the “602”, “480”, and “623” area codes are  
considered to be local calls, while all calls outside those area codes are  
considered long distance.  
2. Santa Fe, NM – calls to some office codes within the “505” area code are  
considered to be local calls, while other calls to the “505” area code are  
considered long distance.  
3. Atlanta, GA – all calls to area codes “770” are considered to be local calls  
while some calls to the “404” and “678” area codes are also considered to  
be local calls.  
If you chose to use the Local Dialing Plan, you need to create a dialing plan. If  
you chose SERVER Dial Plan, then you should check with your System  
Administrator if you have questions.  
110  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Preferences  
Calling Within My  
Home Area Code  
Home Area Code – Set this to the Area code where the phone is located. This  
will be used by Call Manager to determine which dialed calls are within your  
home area code and when searching a contact manager (reverse screen-  
pop) the dialed number will need the area code included, i.e. Microsoft  
Outlook. This is a duplicate of the entry to the one made in the Dialing Tab,  
thus the value entered previously will show here.  
All Home Area Code Numbers Local? – Select either All Calls in my Area  
Code or only Calls to these Office Codes.  
Local Office Codes – This entry is only presented if you chose Call to these  
Office Codes in the previous step. The pull down listing shows the exchange  
codes (prefix codes) that are considered to be a local call from your location.  
Click the C button to display the “Change Dial Rules” screen.  
To Add Local Prefix Codes – Enter the prefix code and click Add. The  
wild card character ‘#’ can be entered at the end of a prefix code entry  
to represent a range of codes. For example, 75# would represent all  
codes 750 to 759 and 7## would represent codes 700 to 799.  
To Delete Local Prefix Codes – Highlight a prefix entry and click  
Delete button. The delete button removes the entire entry from the  
list, thus if the entry has a wild card, then it removes all codes  
represented by the wild card character.  
To Delete a Specific Prefix Code – To delete one prefix code that is  
part of a range of codes entered using a wild card character, enter the  
prefix code to be considered not local in the Long Distance box and  
click Add. For example, if prefix code 755 is long distance but all other  
75# codes are local, first enter 75# into the local list and the add 755  
as Long Distance – the resulting local list will be 750, 751, 752, 753,  
754, 756, 757, 758 and 759.  
Dial Area Code on Local Calls – Enable this feature in areas, such as Atlanta,  
where you must always dial the full 10-digit phone number (include the area  
code) even when the call is local. Most areas of the US, local calls do not  
include the area code and dial only 7 digit numbers for local calls. Any number  
dialed from another program or hot key dialing will be down to its base 7 digits  
by removing the Home Area Code before it is dialed.  
Add+1 – Check the box if you need to dial a leading 1 before the number for  
calls within your Home Area Code.  
Dial Area Code Plus the Number – Check the box when the home area code  
is also to be dialed.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Preferences  
Calling Outside My Home  
Area Code  
Any calls outside your Home Area Code LOCAL calls? – Select either  
None or Only Calls to These Area+Office Codes.  
Local Area+Office Codes – This entry is only presented when you chose  
Only Call to These Area+Office Codes in the previous step. The pull down  
listing shows the codes (area code plus prefix codes) that are considered  
to be a local call from your location. Click the C button to display the  
“Change Dial Rules” screen.  
To Add Local Area+Prefix Codes – Enter the six digit area+prefix  
code and click Add. The wild card character ‘#’ can be entered at  
the end of a prefix code entry to represent a range of codes. For  
example, 602### would represent all prefix codes in area code  
602.  
To Delete Local Area+Prefix Codes – Highlight a prefix entry and  
click Delete button. The delete button removes the entire entry  
from the list, thus if the entry has a wild card, then it removes all  
codes represented by the wild card.  
To Delete a Specific Area+Prefix Code – To delete one prefix  
code that is part of a range of codes entered using a wild card  
character, enter the prefix code to be considered not local in the  
Long Distance box and click Add.  
For Long Distance Calls add +1 – Check the box when you need to have  
a leading one (“1”) added when making long distance calls outside your  
home area code.  
Test a Phone Number  
Dialing plans can become complex. Use these boxes to enter different  
telephone numbers and check to see the number that will be dialed. The  
dialed number should be identical to what you need to dial when using your  
phone.  
112  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Preferences  
Docking Tab  
The docking tab defines the contents of Call Manager when docked to the top or  
bottom of the screen. This includes whether docking is enabled or disabled and a  
listing of contents by display priority (space limits what can be displayed).  
Enable Screen Docking – When enabled, the Call Manager will automatically  
‘dock’ to the top or bottom of the PC screen when it is moved to the top or  
bottom. When dragged completely to the top, it has a slim dock view.  
Docking Settings  
Enable ReDock on Startup – Check this box to make Call Manager to startup  
in the same position and condition as when it was last shut down.  
Used Elements – The displays, buttons, etc. to be used in each profile are  
configured by moving available elements to the “Used Elements” list.  
Whenever the Call Manager is screen docked, it will place the elements from  
the “Used Elements” list on its screen.  
Available Elements – The “Available Elements” list shows the types of  
elements that are available for use in this profile.  
Note: Once you’ve changed the screen-docking settings, the new settings will  
not be used until the Call Manager is ‘undocked’ (if it’s already screen-  
docked) and then re-docked.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Preferences  
Advanced Tab  
Access this screen by clicking Preferences > General > Advanced tab. The  
basic connection for the Call Manager can be changed using this screen. It  
also has the capability of sending log files to Technical Support for debugging  
problems encountered. The TAPI Service Provider should not be changed  
unless your System Administrator has instructed you to update the settings  
for finding Net Server for your application.  
114  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Preferences  
TAPI Service Provider  
Enter the Service Provider Name – This must be set to access the TAPI  
service provider to be used – typically, this would be set to: Net Server.  
Setup – Click the Setup button to open a screen to define the TAPI Service  
Provider as shown on the following page. The I button is a handy status  
indicator for reading the version levels and license codes for the system and  
is shown in the Tapi SPI Info screen.  
Login name – Enter your Login name. If a new installation, a client will  
automatically be created in Net Server for this name. Many times the  
administrator will have defined your client Login name, see your  
administrator for the name to use.  
Password – Enter an optional password for protecting the connection,  
when needed.  
Extension – Enter the extension number of the phone this Call  
Manager is monitoring for call information.  
Hostname – Enter the name of the Server PC where Net Server  
resides.  
Use Remote Access Port – Check this box only when connecting  
remotely through the Internet. When connected locally through your  
LAN, do not check this box.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Preferences  
Diagnostic Logging/  
Uplink  
Clicking this button enables the Debug utility and have it show on the Main  
Menu under Settings as well as provide an easy utility for sending all the  
important information about Call Manager to assist Technical Support to help  
diagnose any problems when necessary.  
Show Advanced Menu – Place a check in the box to enable the Tool tab  
Advanced menu option. This needs to be enabled to capture events or  
show call information when Call Manager is operating.  
Note: The statement “TAPI SPI Logging: DISABLED” is the normal  
indication and is provided to show Tech Support of the status of this  
device. Tech Support will provide specific instructions for turning on  
this setting.  
Uplink Debug Files Button – Click this button to access the screen for  
creating a site name, a contact for the file transfer, and the changing of  
any options for reporting a problem.  
Site Name – Before using the Uplink Debug Files button, a site name and  
contact must to be selected. The site name is a unique identifier to make  
it easier to find the log files for your site and typically, the contact should  
be assigned “Any Tech Support” to ensure the log files are seen by  
someone. Use a specific contact name once you are working with an  
agent and they request you send the “Zip Log Files” to them.  
Description – It is highly recommended to write a description of the  
problem including all pertinent details such as the conditions and  
approximate time the incident occurred. These descriptions aid in  
narrowing down where to look in the log files for the problem  
encountered.  
Options – Clicking the Options button opens a screen to provide options  
for how the files are to be sent. The default and recommended option is to  
“Send Directly to FTP Site”. As an option, when direct Internet access is  
not available from that PC, the files can be zipped into smaller files, saved  
on your PC in your Local Settings folder, typically “C:\Documents and  
Settings\<user name>\Local Settings\Application Data\Toshiba\Call  
Manager\Zip”. These files can then be e-mailed to.  
116  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Preferences  
Setting Up Hot Key  
Dialing & Popup  
Call Manager provides two global “Hot Keys” that you can press within any  
application to send a request to Call Manager. The first key is the Dial Hot Key  
provides a method for dialing a number from any application. For example, you  
may have a phone number in a Microsoft Word document that you can highlight in  
the Word document and press the hot key combination assigned. This dials the  
number in Call Manager. By default the Hot Key is F11.  
The second key is the Popup Hot Key, which will bring Call Manager to the front  
on the screen. This can be very useful if the Call Manager is minimized or is  
behind other windows on your screen. Call Manager must be running for this hot  
key to work.  
Setting Shortcut  
Keys  
Click Preferences > Hot Keys displays the Hot Key Dialing & Popup setup dialog  
box:  
Dial Hot Key – Enable the hot key button and select the key to use including  
any modifying keys to be used in combination.  
Popup Hot Key – Enable the hot key button and select the key to use  
including any modifying keys to be used in combination.  
Note: Many applications use various “hot keys” or keyboard shortcuts. These  
keys are defined in advanced settings that your administrator can change  
if you encounter a conflict with another application. See “Call Manager  
System Administration Manual” for details.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Preferences  
Skin Editor  
The entire color scheme as well as the look-and-feel of the Call Manager can  
be changed dramatically, by simply selecting a different skin.  
Skins can affect the following elements of Call Manager:  
Screen background colors, texture and appearance.  
LCD colors and fonts  
Calls window color and font.  
Title bar logo and Application menu logo.  
Programmable Button colors and fonts.  
ACD Keys colors.  
To access the skins editor, go to Preferences > Skins Editor. The main screen  
for the Skins Designer (shown below), provides a preview for how the skin will  
look as it is being designed.  
Title Bar Logo  
Title Bar  
Application  
Menu Logo  
Quick Toolbar  
Dynamic Ribbon  
LCD  
Call Control View  
Buttons and  
ACD Buttons  
Enter the appropriate information when creating the skins:  
Skin Name – show current skin to be used and being edited. The drop  
down list will show currently available skin name.  
Color Scheme – set of predetermine color scheme. On some color  
scheme, users could blend the color secondary color to make a different  
color.  
Title Bar – change title bar logo to another image file. Supported image  
formats are PNG, BMP, JPEG, GIF.  
Application Menu – change the application menu logo to another image  
file. It supports similar file formats as those of Title Bar.  
118  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Preferences  
When the design is complete, then you can easily change to this skin by right-  
clicking the mouse on the logo on the main window and selecting the skin name  
from the Phone Colors menu.  
Skins Files  
Each skin design is saved in a file, which is a file starting with "skin_" and ending  
with ".INI". These files are stored along with other configuration data on your PC  
in the Local Settings Call Manager folder\skins. A number of basic skin designs  
are included with Call Manager.  
Saving/Creating  
New/Deleting  
Skins  
Icons next to the skin name provide easy access to save, save as, create new,  
and delete skin functions. Some of these icons can also be accessed using the  
application menu button. To exit the skin editor, just click the cross icon on the top  
right corner of the skin editor.  
To Create a New Skin  
Click the "new" icon, and a "Skin Name" dialog will pop up to allow you to enter  
the name of the skin. The new skin, initially, will have current existing configuration  
as you see on the skin editor. You can start changing it.  
To Load an Existing  
Skin  
Click on Skin Name drop down list to load an existing skin.  
Once changes have been made, click the Save icon to save it.  
To Save a Skin  
To Save As a Skin  
When creating a new Skin, changing an existing skin, or to save a skin using a  
different name, click the Save As icon. A "Skin Name" dialog will display. Enter the  
new skin name.  
To Delete a Skin  
With the Skin loaded to be deleted, click the Delete icon. Click Yes in the dialog  
box to confirm the action. The system should have at least one skin; deleting the  
last skin will be rejected.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Preferences  
The Skin Editor  
Start by Opening a Skin File or Creating a New File.  
The design begins by loading an existing Skin File or starting with a new skin  
design. See the procedures above.  
Set Background Color and  
General Appearance  
Select the color scheme from the drop down menu. On some color schemes,  
i.e. Office2007 Blue, Office2007 Black, and Office2007 Silver, you have the  
option to blend secondary colors to make a different color from the standard  
Office 2007 colors.  
Blend Color – When this option is shown, you can click the option to bring  
up a color palette dialog box to select the blend color.  
Note: The bend option is not available on some color schemes, for  
example, Red Planet does not have a blend option and it will not  
display on the menu.  
Clear Blend Color – Click this option to clear selected blend color.  
LCD Background  
and Text Colors  
The LCD Display reflects the current status of the phone and offers two lines.  
The background color and the top and bottom line text can be chosen for your  
display. Messages that appear on the bottom line can have three different  
colors depending upon the priority of the text being displayed. The priority is  
determined by your settings in the Extra Call Information configuration.  
These settings can be found in Preferences tab > General > Extra Call  
Information.  
Right-click on the LCD area to bring up the menu options:  
Change background color  
Change Top Line Text color  
Change High Priority Text Color  
Change Medium Priority Text Color  
120  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Preferences  
Change Low Priority Text Color  
Change Font  
Reset  
Insert your Logo  
into the Skin  
You can choose a graphic different from the default logo that may be used for  
display in the title line of the Call Manager display, and application menu logo.  
The Skin Editor provides a series of default graphics and allows for using .png,  
.jpg, .gif, or. bmp-formatted graphics as well. The graphic size should not be larger  
than 22 x 224 pixels to fit within the available space.  
Click the Title Bar option to change Title Bar logo. Browse to select your  
graphic file in the dialog box.  
Click on Application Menu option to change application menu logo. Browse to  
select your graphic file in the dialog box.Set the Call Window Colors and Font  
Changing Call  
Windows  
Right click on any call window area, to show menu options:  
Change background color  
Change text color  
Change font  
Appearance  
Reset  
Changing the  
Button/ACD  
Button  
You can change default button colors and font; and change colors of ACD status  
buttons.  
Appearance  
Default button – By clicking the Default button, you can revert to the default  
setting of any button when it is initialized or reset. Right click on the default  
button to show menu options:  
Change background color  
Change text color  
Change font  
Reset: Clicking the reset button resets the colors and font to the default  
values for buttons that have not be customized with different colors.  
ACD status buttons – Select the ACD status button and right click to bring menu  
options:  
Change background color  
Change text color  
Reset: Click this button to reset to the default colors for the specific ACD  
status.  
Click Hide Colors when done.Finish by Saving your Design  
Use the Save or Save As commands to save your design before exiting. See  
above for details.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Preferences  
Email skins  
To send the skin using email, click on the email  
skin button (shown right). A Microsoft Outlook  
message dialog box displays (shown below).  
Enter the appropriate address(s) to send the  
skin.  
Email skins  
Microsoft Outlook is required when using this function.  
122  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Preferences  
Tab Settings  
The options to add, update or delete tabs can be found here. Tab settings is for  
managing companion applications. The Revert button brings all the companion  
applications that have been docked outside back to the main window.  
Add Tab  
Click the Add Tab button to add a new tab.  
Name – sets the text in the tab.  
Type – The drop down allows the user to select a companion application. A  
companion application will not appear in the 'Type' drop down if all instances  
are added to a tab. The More Buttons allows eight instances. All other  
companion application allow one instance.  
Tooltip – allows the user to set a tooltip for the tab.  
Update Tab  
Click the Update Tab button to change the appearance order, name, type, and  
tooltip of each tab in your tab view. The 'Name' or 'Tooltip' can be changed by  
clicking in the cell and typing.Use the Up and Down buttons to move the tabs  
appropriately, then click OK.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Preferences  
Delete Tab  
Click on the item in the 'Tab' column to toggle deletion (icon has a red 'X'  
through it to indicate it will be deleted). Hold down the shift or control key to  
select multiple items. Drag the mouse to select multiple items.  
Click the Delete tab button to delete any tab. However, deleting the tab does  
not delete it permanently, it's more like hiding it from view. All deleted tabs can  
be re-added with the “Add” button.  
Also, not “all information” is lost. For example, deleting the history tab will not  
clear the history log. Deleting a buttons tab will not re-initialize all the buttons  
the next time a buttons tab is added. The same is true of the dialer: your  
planned calls are will still be there when you re-add the application (though  
they will not fire unless the application is running). The only exceptions is the  
Browser tab the browsing history may be lost, since deleting a web browser  
tab and adding a new one always starts on a new blank page.  
Revert  
Click the revert button to bring all the companion applications back to the  
main window as tabs.  
124  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Buttons  
11  
This chapter shows how to use and add, delete or edit button and button banks.  
Programmable  
Buttons  
To access Buttons  
There are three methods to access buttons:  
1. Click on the Personal Call Handler button  
and then the Buttons tab.  
2. There are nine preloaded buttons at the center of the Call Manager screen  
(shown below).  
3. Only the More Buttons companion application tabs have more buttons. These  
buttons can also be undocked using the dock / undock  
button on the  
left. You can create tabs of more buttons. There are 8 banks with a total of up  
to 64 buttons each. Each Buttons application can be assigned to one of these  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Buttons  
8 banks, which means the buttons in that bank are displayed in the  
application (No two applications can share the same bank).  
User Programmable  
Keys  
The Call Manager has many different User Programmable keys on the main  
screen, on the Side Window, or on the Extra Button windows. These keys and  
can be easily configured by the user as “Feature” keys, “Speed Dial” keys,  
“User Action” keys, “DSS” keys, “Web Access” keys, “Run another  
Application” keys, or “ACD” keys, etc. This provides the user with one-touch  
access to features, applications, files, phone numbers, employees, and more.  
To change any of these keys simply right-click the mouse over the key and  
select from the menu one of the following options:  
To Initialize Key  
To Swap Keys  
This resets the key to a blank default state. This makes it much easier to use  
the drag and drop techniques for setting up keys.  
To swap the configuration of two programmable keys you can right click on a  
button, then select the Swap Keys option, then click on another button. Notice  
that the button has now been swapped. To do this, hold the Control key down  
while using the left mouse button to drag a key to another location. Or select  
Swap Keys and then drag & drop key to new location. Keys will swap within  
the same window and between any other button window.  
To Copy This Key  
To Change Key  
To Copy the configuration of one programmable key to another hold the  
keyboard Control and Shift keys down while using the left mouse button to  
drag the key to be copied to its target. Or select Copy This Key and then drag  
& drop to new location. Keys will copy within the same window and between  
the Side window and the Main Screen. Keys on the Main Screen or the Side  
window will not copy to keys on the Extra Buttons windows or vice versa.  
This opens the Setup Key configuration settings shown below. Several items  
in the upper portion of this window define the appearance and label of the  
button. Selecting an Action from the pull down listing will present additional  
parameters needed to define the choice. Details for each Action follow this  
procedure.  
126  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
IPedge  
Buttons  
Note: Some users may not have permission to change buttons and keys.  
Sample – Displays the appearance of the following selections.  
Key Label – Type a label for the key.  
Back Color – Choose the color of the key.  
Text Color – Choose the text color to use for the key label.  
Default Colors – Pressing this button will reset the colors of the key and text to  
the default for the skin used.  
Action – Choose an action to be performed. This selection will open additional  
settings corresponding to that action. See the settings below for the different  
possible actions.  
Feature Code Keys  
Provides one-button access to a Feature Code on the system. You can include  
additional digits when appropriate. The system used will determine access to the  
Feature Codes available. For example, to log into ACD Group x2000, you could  
set the Parameter to “326 2000” to work as a Log In key.  
Speed Dial Keys  
Creates a speed dial key for one-button dialing. Call Manager automatically  
inserts the Trunk Access Code when a Dial Plan has been specified, making it  
unnecessary to enter this code in the speed dial number. Speed Dial numbers can  
be any number 0~9 and * and # digits. You can include commas to insert a 2-  
second pause in the dial string, i.e., setting up a key to call V-mail (x2502) and  
logon to a mailbox (1000 with password 12345) then enter “2502, *1000,12345”.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Buttons  
You can also include an “X” character in a phone number string to have the  
dialing stop at that point and queue up the rest of the number in the dial buffer.  
The user can listen to the call and click the Dial button to dial the rest of the  
digits at the appropriate time. Examples include: (1) dialing a person who has  
an extension number (i.e. “4969040 x1008”), (2) dialing a pager and you want  
to display a number on the LCD of the pager (i.e. “5551234x4969040#”), or  
(3) dialing a long distance access code (i.e. “8884083279 x17135551234”).  
Note: You can use more than one “X” in the phone number and it will wait  
after each “X” (i.e. “4969040 x8 x*1009,1234”).  
System/PBX Command  
Keys  
The System/PBX command keys are maintained for backward compatibility. It  
is highly recommended that the user create User Defined Actions for System/  
PBX Commands. The User Defined Actions have expanded the options  
available for a number of these commands and thus offer better choices.  
The description below shows the possible features that appear in the Setup  
Key window. Some of the features listed are dependant upon Call Manager  
System Administration settings such as the Auto Call Record/Tracer  
Recording features, which only appear when the System Administrator  
enables those items. Others are dependant upon the PBX used by Call  
Manager.  
128  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Buttons  
The commands that may be available will depend upon the PBX you are using.  
Commands that may be available include:  
PBX Call Control  
Auto Call Record/Tracer Recording  
Start Record  
Answer – Current call.  
Conference – Simulates pushing Conf  
key.  
Stop Record  
Dial xxxxxx – xxxx= the number to  
dial.  
Set Bookmark “Msg”  
Hangup – Hangup current call.  
Hold – Hold current call.  
* Modify Call “Field” “Value  
* Transfer  
Call Center  
ACD – Agent Help  
ACD – Call Pickup  
Set Work Units “Value”  
* An enhanced feature is available in User Defined Actions  
User Defined Action  
Keys  
Customized features can be placed on keys by using User Defined Actions.  
Actions that have been defined will be available in the pull down list.  
Click to view  
the actions list  
to add/edit  
actions  
To create a new action, go to the User Actions section, click the View/Change  
action button on right (shown above). The following screen displays.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
IPedge  
Buttons  
Select the appropriate action or button to add, copy, edit, test, or delete  
action. The appropriate action screen displays. Click Save and then click  
Done.  
Refer to Chapter 5 – Actions for more information on editing actions.  
ACD Keys  
ACD keys can be set on any button, including Buttons companion  
applications and the side view buttons.  
Depending on the configuration of your call center, these keys can be used to:  
(1) Login or Logout of ACD groups (via Agent ID and phone Extension) and/or  
(2) to Show/Set your Agent status. Other ACD functions may be available in  
the User-Defined Actions depending upon the PBX used with Call Manager.  
Note: The color of ACD Keys cannot be changed as the colors are  
determined by the ACD State for the key.  
DSS Extension Keys  
Direct Station Selection provides one-button dialing to a specific station. DSS  
Keys also provide a visual status indicator of the station: Ringing, Busy, Idle,  
or Do-Not-Disturb.  
To create DSS keys  
1. Set action to DSS extension key.  
2. Click the magnifying glass.  
3. Select the contact from your directory, as it is shown in the little popup on  
the side. This will set the label for you.  
You can then change the colors and edit the name for easy identification.  
130  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Buttons  
Web Keys  
Web keys allow you to program an Internet (or intranet) URL into the key. Press  
the key to open the default web browser to the specified web page.  
Run Program Keys  
This sets the key to run a specific application or load a specific document. For  
example you could create a “Calculator” key to run the windows calculator by  
setting the “Program filename” to CALC.EXE. Alternatively you could create a key  
to show your “projects” Excel spreadsheet by simply setting the “Program or  
Document Filename” to: PROJECTS.XLS.  
Creating Keys using  
Drag & Drop  
Program unused keys by simply dragging phone numbers or feature codes from  
other programs. Some examples include:  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Buttons  
Drag a Contact from Microsoft Outlook to a key to create a Speed Dial  
button  
Drag a call from the Call History to create a Speed Dial button  
Drag an entry from the Contacts application to create a Speed Dial button  
132  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Actions  
12  
You can define powerful actions that can be used with both the Personal Call  
Handler and under the Programmable Keys. These actions can be as simple as  
playing a .WAV file to as powerful as sending a specific DDE message to another  
programs to “Screen Pop” a database. When defining a new action, it's usually a  
good idea to test the action to make sure it works correctly. The screens for  
creating actions also provide a testing facility to make this testing easy.  
Note: Depending on your configuration you may not be able to change the  
User-Defined Actions, in which case you should check with your System  
Administrator.  
Creating Actions  
The Creating of Actions can be done by going to the Actions tab.  
Under the Actions List, a the drop down shows a listing of currently defined  
actions and options that you can Add, Copy, Edit/Test or Delete. Pressing the Add,  
Copy, or Edit/Test buttons takes you to a screen for creating or editing an action.  
The types of actions that can be created are defined below. When actions are  
copied, created, or edited, those changes are stored in the compiled actions file  
(NET_PHN.acs). If this file is lost for some reason and Call Manager is restarted,  
all actions will revert to the individual actions stored in the User’s Local Settings  
Call Manager folder. Thus, it is wise to save new actions by exporting the action  
for backup (see “Exporting Actions and Importing Actions).  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Actions  
Attach Account  
Code  
This action attaches an account code to the active call. This account code is  
passed to other applications such as Insight or TASKE Contact.  
* Account # – Enter an accounting number to be associated with this call.  
Export Call Info  
This action is used to export call information to another program (like the CTI  
Call Handler) in order to keep its Call Info Database current. When this action  
is triggered it will Popup an “Export Call Info” screen allowing the user to fill in  
any missing call information (typically the 'Main Listed Phone #') before they  
press SAVE to export the information to the centralized database.  
Path & Filename – Enter the complete path name for writing the exported  
file or browse to find the path.  
134  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
Actions  
Log Info to File  
This action writes a string of information to a text file. This can be used to make a  
call log, like personal SMDR, and/or to trigger actions in other programs. A wide  
range of call and system variables (see “Action Variables” on page 148) may be  
used to create the information to be written into the file.  
Log Filename – Enter the complete path name of the file to log the  
information. Use the Browse button to find the file name, when needed.  
Log String – Create the string defining the content to be written into the file.  
The above example created the following entries into the file “CallsLog.txt”.  
Note: The number of characters sent for the name variable was limited to the  
first 10 characters (%+10N), which truncated the names in the file to the  
first 10 characters. See “Action Variables” on page 148 for details.  
12/02/04 16:27  
12/02/04 16:28  
12/02/04 16:28  
In 1027 480-496-9040 Joe Blow I No  
In 1027 480-629-8723 Joyce Gree Yes  
In 1027 949-853-3351 Katz Yamag Yes  
Lookup in  
Outlook  
This action will lookup the phone number in Microsoft Outlook and then selectively  
opens a contact, creates a new contact, or adds a journal entry.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Actions  
Minimize Phone  
Screen  
This action shrinks the Call Manager screen to an Icon in the Tool Tray. To  
return Call Manager to its original position requires the user to either double-  
click the icon in the tray or right-click and select Show.  
Modify Call  
Information  
This action changes the Caller ID name, Caller ID name, or Account code of  
the active call on this phone and when the PBX supports the changes, the  
same information held in the PBX. Using the Extra Info option provides for  
entering or changing any other information associated with the call.  
Information Type – Select either Standard Info or Extra Info. The Standard  
Info option supports updating the information in the IPedge. The Extra  
Info option can enter or change any field for this call.  
Standard Info  
Phone Number – Enter a phone number to be used as the Caller ID  
number for this call. This replaces an existing number or adds a number,  
if blank.  
Name – Enter a name for the caller to be used as the Caller ID name.  
This replaces an existing name or adds a name, if blank.  
Account # – Enter an account code for the call. This replaces an existing  
number or adds a number, if blank.  
136  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
IPedge  
Actions  
Extra Info  
Field Name – Enter the name of the field to be changed. This name must  
match exactly the field name including uppercase and lowercase syntax. For  
example, a user may want to create User Programmable Keys identifying the  
“Preferred Agent” for the call prior to transferring the call into a queue. The  
Field Name would be entered as PREFAGENT. The value would be the  
agent’s ID code.  
Value – Enter the value to be used for this field. Following the above example,  
then the agent’s ID code would be entered into this field.  
Play WAV File  
This action will play a specified WAV file on the PC sound card.  
Path & Filename – Enter the complete path name for the WAV file to be  
played or browse to find the path of the file.  
Pop External  
Web Browser  
This action sends a URL to the PC’s default web browser (run the web browser if  
it isn't already running). Works with Netscape Navigator and Microsoft Internet  
Explorer.  
URL – Enter the complete URL name for the Web site to be opened in your  
browser. The URL can contain Action Variables to make the lookup use call  
information.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
IPedge  
Actions  
Pop Internal Web  
Browser  
This action can be used to send a URL to the ‘built-in’ web browser of the Call  
Manager (when installed) or can be used to create access to other companion  
application programs.  
An example of using your Personal Call Handler to automatically open the  
Integrated Web Window, whenever an outside call rings in, to provide a script  
to for answering that call. The URL can contain action variables for example  
using the DID/DNIS number used for the call to open a page created for each  
DID/DNIS number. Thus when the call arrives, a screen opens for a script or  
questions to use for that call.  
Another use may be to have several “Personal Directories” where the 8  
button limit may not allow access to more directories. Assigning a  
programmable button can allow opening these personal directories using  
one-click access.  
Tab Name – Enter the name of an existing Web Browser Companion  
Application (tab name). This name must exactly match the name as  
displayed. This action uses the specified tab as the parent window.  
URL (Param1) – Enter a URL or other Param1 parameters as indicated in  
the table below. The URL can contain Action Variables as part of the  
entry.  
138  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Actions  
Popup Call Info  
Screen  
This action will pop open either the Standard Call Info screen or Extra Call Info  
screen. The Standard Call Info screen allows the user to type in the Caller ID  
name or number or Account code of a call, lookup the phone number in Outlook  
and/or Open a Contact or Journal, or Divert a Ringing call to another location.  
Either screen allows you to view, change, or attach additional extra information to  
a call. The fields shown in this window are defined in Preferences, General Tab  
(see “Extra Info Screen” on page 23).  
Extra Call Information window  
Standard Call Information window  
Popup Info Screen Type – Choose either Standard Info or Extra Info. When  
Extra Info is selected, choose when the popup will occur: Always, Any Info  
Attached, or Any Priority Info.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Actions  
Popup Phone  
Screen  
This action causes a popup (Restore) of the Call Manager screen from an  
icon.  
Phone Screen Size – Select the size for Call Manager’s main screen. The  
choices are to restore to the Last Size Used, Small (or compact view), or  
Large (or expanded view). When Call Manager is docked to the top or  
bottom, Call Manager restores to settings defined in the Preferences  
Docking tab.  
Run another  
Program  
This action triggers the running of another program on the PC.  
Program EXE – Enter the name and path of the program to be run. In the  
example above, the program is Outlook.exe. Use the Browse button to  
find the file as needed.  
Parameters – Enter any additional parameters that may be accepted as  
part of the command line to startup the program. The example above  
uses Outlook to pop open a “sticky note” with data and time recorded.  
140  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Actions  
Send DDE Msg  
This action sends a DDE Execute message to another program on the PC.  
Frequently this is used to “Screen Pop” a contact management program, such as  
Goldmine.  
App Name Topic – The application will specify both the application name and  
topic name used for making the communication link. Follow the application  
note or that application’s documentation for specifics.  
Note: The pipe character ‘|’ must separate the application name and topic  
name.  
DDE Message – Follow the application note or the application’s  
documentation to define the message to be sent for that application. The  
format and syntax is defined by that application.  
Run Program and Program EXE – If the target program is NOT found to be  
running, you can have the action attempt to automatically start the program.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Actions  
Send Keystrokes to  
a Program  
This action provides a way to send keystrokes to another Windows program  
just as if the user typed them into that program. This can be used, for  
example, to pop up another program whenever a call rings in.  
Note: Use this action carefully because when the action is triggered, the  
keystrokes will be sent to the target program regardless of the state of  
that program (i.e. even when the user is in the middle of some action  
in that program).  
App Title – must exactly match the text in the title bar of the target  
program (not case sensitive).  
Key Strokes – You can send any keys including special keys (see below).  
One or more characters represent each keystroke. To specify a single  
keyboard character, use the character itself. For example, to represent  
the letter A, use “A” for key text. If you want to represent more than one  
character, append each additional character to the one preceding it. To  
represent the letters A, B, and C, use “ABC” for key text.  
Run Program if Not Running – If the target program is NOT found  
running, you can have the action attempt to automatically start the  
program.  
Program EXE – Enter the path to the program to be run and a command-  
line parameter when needed to the target program for startup. Use a  
forward slash after the EXE name and before the command line  
parameter(s).  
Example Action:  
The example in the diagram sends keystrokes to the Notepad program to  
Popup (restore) the program and to move the cursor to the end of the file.  
1. App Title: The App Title must match exactly what appears in the title bar  
of Notepad: calls.txt - Notepad  
2. Key Strokes: To restore Notepad (Alt Sp R): Key Strokes:= %%{ }R and  
to move to the end of the file (Control+End): append to Key Strokes:  
^{END}  
3. In Program EXE: Enter program name and file name to open  
“Notepad.exe /calls.txt”.  
Note: The forward slash after “Notepad.exe” is needed to allow the  
command-line parameter “/calls.txt” to be used. The result is that the  
file “calls.txt” will open, if not open, and popup with the cursor at the  
end of the file allowing additional entries to be made.  
142  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Actions  
Special Keys  
The plus sign (+), caret (^), percent sign (%), tilde (~), and parentheses ( ) have  
special meanings. To specify one of these characters, enclose it inside braces.  
For example, to specify the plus sign, use {+}. Brackets ([ ]) also must enclose  
them in braces. To send brace characters, use {{} and {}}.  
To specify characters that aren't displayed when you press a key (such as Enter or  
Tab) and keys that represent actions rather than characters, use the codes shown  
below:  
Key  
Backspace  
Code  
{BS} or {BKSP}  
{BREAK}  
{CAPSLOCK}  
{CLEAR}  
{DEL}  
Key  
Code  
{TAB}  
Tab  
Break  
Up Arrow  
F1  
{UP}  
{F1}  
{F2}  
{F3}  
{F4}  
{F5}  
{F6}  
{F7}  
{F8}  
{F9}  
{F10}  
{F11}  
{F12}  
{F13}  
{F14}  
{F15}  
{F16}  
^
Caps Lock  
Clear  
F2  
Del  
F3  
Down Arrow  
End  
{DOWN}  
{END}  
F4  
F5  
Enter  
{ENTER}  
{ESC}  
F6  
Esc  
F7  
Help  
{HELP}  
F8  
Home  
{HOME}  
{INS}  
F9  
Ins  
F10  
F11  
F12  
F13  
F14  
F15  
F16  
Control  
Alt  
Left Arrow  
Num Lock  
Page Down  
Page Up  
Right Arrow  
Scroll Lock  
Spacebar  
Shift  
{LEFT}  
{NUMLOCK}  
{PGDN}  
{PGUP}  
{RIGHT}  
{SCROLLLOCK}  
{ }  
+
%%  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Actions  
Combination Keys  
To specify keys combined with any combination of Shift, Control, and Alt keys,  
precede the regular key code with Shift, Control, or Alt code.  
To specify that Shift, Ctrl, and/or Alt should be held down while several other  
keys are pressed, enclose the code in parentheses. For example, to have the  
Shift key held down while E and C are pressed, use “+(EC)”. The code “+EC”  
will send the characters Ec instead of EC and “E+C” will send the characters  
eC.  
To specify repeating keys, use the form {key number}; you must put a space  
between key and number. For example, {LEFT 42} means press the Left  
Arrow key 42 times; {h 10} means press h 10 times.  
Note: Keystrokes cannot be sent to an application that is not designed to  
run in Microsoft Windows (MS-DOS programs, even in a DOS  
window) nor can the Print Screen (PRTSC) key be sent to any  
application.  
Set Phone Status  
Message  
This action works much the same as Set Phone Do Not Disturb except it does  
not change the phone’s DND status and the message only appears within  
Call Manager and the DSS keys on other users of Call Manager.  
Choose DND Message – Select from the available messages in the drop  
down list for the message that appears in the upper line of the phone’s  
display.  
Custom 2nd Line – Optionally enter a second line to display on the lower  
line of the phone’s display message.  
Note: Action Variables may be used including the time variable plus ‘x’  
minutes to set a current time plus 60 minutes in the example above.  
144  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Actions  
Set Phone  
Forwarding  
This action changes the Call Forwarding setting of the phone in the PBX for the  
prime DN of the phone. The action can determine the type of forwarding  
(Immediate, Busy, No Answer, Busy/No Answer, or Off) and the destination.  
Choose Forwarding – Select from the drop down list the forwarding action to  
use.  
Destination – Define the number for the destination of the forwarding. This is  
left blank when using Forwarding Off.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Actions  
System/PBX  
Command  
This action can be used to send appropriate OAI commands to the PBX to  
perform functions. For example, you could have an action that sets your DND  
message to “UNAVAILABLE” using the following: N 16. You could then set  
this action to run each time you shutdown your phone.  
System/PBX Command – Select from the list of available commands and  
edit the variable values (shown in quotation marks) as needed. The  
commands available are as follows:  
ANSWER  
CONFERENCE  
DIALxxxxx  
Where xxxxx – is the number to be dialed. Digits  
0~9,*,#. A ‘,’ is a pause and ‘!’ is a hook-flash..  
Parenthesis, semi-colons, dashes, and spaces are  
ignored, thus (480) 496-9040 can be entered.  
HANGUP  
HOLD  
MODIFYCALL  
“Field”, “Value  
Recommend using Modify Call Information or  
Attach Acct Code action.  
TRANSFER  
Recording Option  
RECORD  
Recommend using Transfer Call action.  
When Recording is active on Call Manager.  
RECORDBKMAKR Substitute your bookmark text for “Text”  
Text  
RECORDSTOP  
ACD Option  
ACD HELP  
When ACD is available on some PBXs.  
ACD PU  
SET WORKUNITS  
146  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Actions  
Transfer Call  
This action causes the active call to be transferred to another phone, directly to a  
specific Voice mailbox, or to an outside phone number (i.e. 9,4969040).  
Transfer To – Enter an extension number or outside number to be called.  
Transfer Mbox – Enter a mailbox number if going to a Voice Mail number.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Actions  
Action Variables  
Call Manager uses variables to provide information to actions. Call Manager  
replaces the variable token code with the appropriate value when the action  
executes. For example, %P becomes ‘4804969040’ when you receive a call  
from Toshiba.  
Call Variables  
Refer to the table below for call variables and their values.  
Variable  
%A  
Information  
Account Number  
%B  
%C  
%D  
%E  
Call Direction (“In” or “Out”)  
DNIS Called Name  
DNIS/DID Number  
This Call Manager’s Extension Number. (Can be used for Pri-  
mary DN or Secondary DN when using Set DND Action.)  
%F  
Call Forwarded from Extension number  
%G  
DND Message, when phone is in DND. (Can be used for Pri-  
mary DN or Secondary DN when using Set DND Action.)  
%H  
Calling Number (hyphenated – type 1, format defined in  
agnt_ph.ini)  
%I  
TAPI Call ID  
%J  
Calling Number (hyphenated – type 2, format defined in  
agnt_ph.ini)  
%L  
Elapsed Time of Call (H:MM:SS)  
%M  
Main Listed Phone Number (Use with Export Call Info  
actions)  
%N  
CallerID Name (outside calls only, requires CallerID)  
%OR(“field”) Outlook Calendar/Reminder “fields”:  
or  
1. “SUBJECT” – subject field of Outlook event.  
2. “START” – start Date/Time of event.  
3. “END” – ending Date/Time of event.  
%OC(“field”)  
4. “IMPORTANCE” – Importance (Low, Normal, High) of  
event.  
5. “LOCATION” – location of event.  
6. “ADVANCE” – number of minutes of advance notice.  
7. “STATUS” – Busy status (Free, Busy, Out of Office) of  
event.  
8. “STIM” – start Time without the Date.  
9. “DIFF” – time difference before event start, e.g., 15 min-  
utes will report “15 Minutes”. Used for text to speech  
announcments.  
%P  
%S  
%T  
Incoming: CallerID Number / ANI; Outgoing: Dialed Number  
Call Answered (“Y”es or “N”o)  
Call Type (“IC” or “CO”): IC= Intercom call; CO= Outside call.  
148  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Actions  
Variable  
%V  
Information  
The Extra Call Info screen allows you to configure a button  
for each Call Info field. This variable,%V, contains the value  
of that Call Info field for use when defining an Action trigger.  
%W  
Contains ‘1’ if Outlook Link found a match in Outlook. Con-  
tains ‘0’ if Outlook Link did not find a match, or was not active.  
%X(“name”)  
Extra Call Info Field, i.e. %X(“Notes”). The name of the field  
must be in double quotations. For a list of field names in your  
system, go to Preferences > General Tab > Extra Info button,  
Add and use the pull down list for fields available on your sys-  
tem.  
%Y  
%Z  
Contains the Outlook Unique Identifier if Outlook Link found a  
matching record in Outlook.  
Call Status (“Ringing”, “Talking”, etc.)  
Note: Insert +x following the ‘%’ character to restrict the variable value to the  
first ‘x’ or leftmost characters. Insert –x to restrict the variable value to the  
last ‘x’ or rightmost characters. For example, to pass the first 8 characters  
of the Calling Party Name, enter: %+8N. To send the last 4 digits of the  
Calling Phone Number, enter: %-4P.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Actions  
System Variables  
Call Manager also uses System Variables for Action parameter strings, such  
as Date and Time. They can also provide some control over text logging  
actions with Carriage Return, Line Feed, Tab, and Random Numbers (for file  
names.) Note: Many System Variables duplicate the Action Variables to  
provide increased compatibility with legacy applications and 3rd Party  
Application Notes.  
Variable  
Information  
&A  
&B  
&C  
&D  
&E  
&F  
&G  
&H  
&I  
Account Number  
PBX Call ID  
Insert a Carriage Return character  
Insert the Date in format: “mm/dd/yy”  
Insert Extension Number of My Phone  
ACD Group Name  
Agent ID  
Calling Phone Number (hyphenated - type 1)  
TAPI Call ID  
&J  
Calling Phone Number (hyphenated - type 2)  
ACD Group extension number  
Insert a Line Feed character  
Calling Party Name (outside calls only)  
&K  
&L  
&N  
&n  
Insert the Date and/or time in user-specified format  
i.e. "&Nhh:mm:ss AM/PM&"  
&P  
&Q  
&R  
&T  
Calling Phone Number  
Random Variable (6 digits)  
Random Variable (8 digits)  
Insert the Time in format: "HH:MM" (24 hour clock).  
Insert the Time in US format: “H:MM AM/PM”.  
VoIP Ringer Audio device (Soft Phone must be used to use)  
VoIP Headset Audio device (Soft Phone must be used to use)  
Destination Field (for Export of Call Info)  
Call Type (“IC” or “CO”): IC= Intercom call; CO= Outside call.  
Insert a Tab Character  
&U  
&V1  
&V2  
&X  
&Y  
&t  
%%  
&&  
Insert a Percent “%” character  
Insert an Ampersand “&” character  
Note: &T and &U variables accept a relative addition of time in the format  
&U+’30’ results in the current time plus 30 minutes. The number of  
minutes must be within single quotation marks. Example: A Set  
Phone Status Message action can be specified selecting the OUT TO  
LUNCH message and a second line of UNTIL &U+’30’. If this action is  
used at 11:55 AM, then the resulting message on Call Manager is  
OUT TO LUNCH UNTIL 12:25 PM.  
Examples for Text Reader/  
Announcer:  
Speak Reminder:  
SPEAK,"Reminder,%OR("SUBJ"),Starting  
%OR("DIFF")",&V1,&V2  
Speak Appointment: SPEAK,"Appointment,%OC("SUBJ"),Starting  
Now",&V1,&V2  
Announce Call:  
CA,%T,&F,"%N",%H,&V1,&V2  
150  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Actions  
Exporting  
Actions  
Once an action has been designed, exporting the action is recommended to  
provide a backup copy as well as a file that can be copied to other Call Managers.  
To export an action, you will need to be in the Add/Edit Action screen and click the  
Show Test button to reveal the testing parameters and the Export Action button.  
Pressing Export Action copies the details of the action into a special file named:  
xx.ACI where 'xx' is a number assigned by the software corresponding to the  
action number (i.e. 2.ACI).  
This file is exported into the user’s application data folder (typically,  
“C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local Settings\Application  
Data\Toshiba\Strata Call Manager”). In order to identify the file more easily you  
may want to user Explorer to rename that file to something more appropriate (i.e.  
PLAYBELL.ACI). When renaming an action file always limit the file name to 8  
characters prior to the .ACI extension. This file can then be copied to another PC  
to give a copy of the action to another user of Call Manager. Leaving a copy in this  
folder provides a backup copy of the action. That will be then be loaded at startup  
if that action were deleted in the Actions List (see Importing Actions below for  
more details).  
Note: When exporting an action, if a file with that name already exists, an error  
message will occur and the action will not be copied – when this occurs you will  
need to use Explorer to rename the existing file and then export again.  
Importing  
Actions  
When the Call Manager program starts up, it automatically imports actions from  
the compiled NET_PHN.ACS action file plus all action files (*.ACx) it finds in its  
startup folder. The last character used in the extension of the file name defines  
how the action file is treated on importing:  
.ACI – These files are individual actions created by Exporting Actions. These  
will be imported only when an action using the same action name does not  
exist in the compiled file. Thus, when this file exists and the user had made  
changes to this action, the user can revert back to the original operation by  
deleting the current action in Call Manager then stopping and restarting Call  
Manager.  
.AC1 – Upon startup, Call Manager always imports all “One-Shot” action files  
(*.AC1). When an action of the same name exists, the action will be  
overwritten. Once imported, the One-Shot export files are deleted. These  
one-shot files can thus be used to import an action just one time allowing the  
user to change or delete the action as desired.  
.ACO – Upon startup, Call Manager always imports all “Over-Write” action  
files and overwrites any action with the same name. These are useful to  
ensure the actions do not get changed or when making corrections on other  
Call Managers.  
.AC0 – This type of file is only imported at initial startup of the Call Manager or  
when the compiled actions file “AGT_PHN.ACS” is not found at startup.  
These files allow you to design an action, export it, rename it, and then copy the  
file to all PCs that need that action. These are also useful to overcome a user  
accidentally deleting an action since they can have a copy of that file on their PC,  
when they exit and restart Call Manager that action will be restored.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Actions  
Testing Actions  
While in the Add/Edit Action screen, a Show Test/Hide Test button is offered.  
Pressing this button when it is titled Show Test, will expand the window to a  
set of “Test Values” that can be set representing the variables used within the  
action. This sets the values of any real time variables for testing your action.  
For example, if your action will be using the “Phone Number” variable (%P,  
%H, or %J) you will want to set the test value of %P to the phone number you  
want to simulate (i.e. 7145551234). Then press the Perform Test button to  
test your action. The “Test Results” screen will show the results of the test and  
if the action fails, you can change the parameters of the action and test again.  
When another application is involved in the action, that application, in general,  
will need to be installed and running to perform the test. Pressing the button  
titled Done Testing will close the “Test Window”.  
Note: If the action seems to work fine when you test it from this screen, but  
doesn't seem to work properly when the action is used by the Call  
Handler you may want to open the Main Menu Icon > Setup >  
Advanced > Show Events screen (see your System Administrator if  
you do not have the Advance menu item) to see what is actually  
occurring when that action is being used.  
152  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Personal Call Handler  
13  
Personal Call  
Handler  
This powerful feature of Call Manager allows you to create Call Handling Rules to  
automatically take actions when certain events occur and specific conditions are  
true. That is, you create a rule so that (1) when an Event occurs, and (2) if certain  
conditions are true, and then (3) perform specific Actions. Following are a few  
examples of what you can accomplish with these Rules:  
When an Outside call with CallerID rings and I'm not on another call, popup  
Microsoft Outlook and lookup the caller info in the database.  
Whenever I answer a call without CallerID, automatically present a screen so  
I can type in the caller info for that call.  
Whenever I dial a call, automatically present a screen so I can type in the  
name for that call.  
When that nagging broker calls, immediately transfer him to my voice  
mailbox.  
I’m working on an important project, so whenever anyone other than my boss  
calls, immediately transfer them to V-mail.  
When my spouse calls, if I haven't answered the call within 5 seconds, play a  
special tone on my PC to alert me.  
Note: Depending on your configuration you may not be able to change the Call  
Handler Rules, in which case you should check with your System  
Administrator.  
The basic process for creating Personal Call Handling rules is to first define the  
actions you would like to accomplish and test them. Then you can create a  
Personal Call Handling Rule and choose which event will trigger the action(s) and  
then refine this by setting the conditions for when the trigger will occur.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Personal Call Handler  
Creating Personal  
Call Handling Rules  
The following items will define how to edit, delete or add new rules. Many  
rules can be created and exist simultaneously. To allow rules to be defined  
and not applied, an enable/disable check box appears before each rule to  
make it easy to disable or enable different rules are different times.  
The order of the listing of the rules determines the sequence the rules will be  
used. Thus, some rules may prevent following rules to be used. For example,  
if the first rule in the list causes the call to divert to another station followed by  
a rule to Screen Pop Outlook, then the Screen Pop will never take place. If the  
rules were reversed, then the Screen Pop will take place prior to the call being  
diverted. In either case, the user may not see the Screen Pop since the call  
will leave this station, thus the Screen Pop will likely disappear as well. For  
the user to see who is calling and provide an ability to answer the call or “do  
nothing”, then creating the Screen Pop to occur immediately and the Call  
Divert action to occur using a time delay, then the two rules would result in  
displaying the Screen Pop and then pausing before diverting the call.  
Note: This example was for illustration purposes. These two actions can  
actually be done within a single rule to make the creating of rules  
simpler.  
To Open Call Handler Rules  
1. Click the Personal Call Handler icon  
The following screen displays.  
> Personal Call Handler tab.  
To Delete a Rule  
Highlight the rule to delete and click Delete.  
To Add or Change a Call Handling Rule  
1. Click the Add button  
154  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Personal Call Handler  
or highlight the rule to be changed and click Edit.  
2. Select a Triggering Event and Set the Conditions  
The types of events that can be used to trigger a rule can be divided into call  
related triggers, system triggers, and status change triggers. Each grouping is  
shown below along with the Conditions offered for the trigger to take effect:  
Call Ringing – Whenever a call rings on the phone.Call Type – Select the call  
type for the ringing call.  
Phone State – Select the Phone State when the call arrives.  
Caller ID Number – Select the Caller ID to be used in the trigger. For  
the last two options, enter a specific number in the box including  
wildcard characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike  
Matches for use of wildcards.  
Extra Info – Select a “Field Name” (CallerID Name, or type in another  
field name) and then choose how to treat this information. For the last  
two options, enter a specific number in the box including wildcard  
characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike Matches for  
use of wildcards.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Personal Call Handler  
Account Code – Select the account code type to be used. For the  
last two options, enter a specific number in the box including  
wildcard characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike  
Matches for use of wildcards.  
Call Answered – Whenever a call is answered on the phone.Call Type –  
Select the call type for the ringing call.  
Call Direction – Select the direction of the call to be triggered.  
Caller ID Number – Select a Caller ID number. For the last two  
options, enter a specific number in the box including wild card  
characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike Matches  
for use of wildcards.  
Extra Info – Select a “Field Name” (CallerID Name, or type in  
another field name) and then choose how to treat this  
information. For the last two options, enter a specific number in  
the box including wildcard characters when needed. See Like  
Matches and Unlike Matches for use of wildcards.  
Account Code – Select the account code type to be used. For the  
last two options, enter a specific number in the box including  
wildcard characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike  
Matches for use of wildcards.  
Call Disconnect – Whenever a call leaves the phone (whether the caller  
hung up or the call was transferred or forwarded).  
156  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Personal Call Handler  
Call Type – Select the call type for the ringing call.  
Call Direction – Select the direction of the call to be triggered.  
Call was Answered – Select whether the call was answered.  
Phone Software Startup –  
Happens whenever the Call  
Manager software starts up and is  
in full operation with the PBX.  
Phone SoftwareShutdown –  
Happens whenever Call Manager  
software is shutdown (using a  
normal Exit).  
FWDed/XFRed Call Ringing – Whenever a call rings on the phone that has  
been either Forwarded or Transferred from another extension.  
Call Type – Select the call type for the ringing call.  
Phone State – Select the Phone State when the call arrives.  
FWD/XFR Ext # – Select the extension number the call is from. For  
the last two options, enter a specific number in the box including wild  
card characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike Matches  
for use of wildcards.  
Extra Info – Select a “Field Name” (CallerID Name, or type in another  
field name) and then choose how to treat this information. For the last  
two options, enter a specific number in the box including wildcard  
characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike Matches for  
use of wildcards.  
Account Code – Select the account code type to be used. For the last  
two options, enter a specific number in the box including wildcard  
characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike Matches for  
use of wildcards.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Personal Call Handler  
ACD Call Ringing – Happens whenever a call rings on the phone that is  
part of an ACD group (ignores non-ACD calls).  
Call Type – Select the call type for the ringing call.  
Phone State – Select the Phone State when the call arrives.  
ACD Pilot Ext # – Select the pilot number the call is from. For the  
last two options, enter a specific number in the box including wild  
card characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike  
Matches for use of wildcards.  
Extra Info – Select a “Field Name” (CallerID Name, or type in  
another field name) and then choose how to treat this  
information. For the last two options, enter a specific number in  
the box including wildcard characters when needed. See Like  
Matches and Unlike Matches for use of wildcards.  
Account Code – Select the account code type to be used. For the  
last two options, enter a specific number in the box including  
wildcard characters when needed. See Like Matches and Unlike  
Matches for use of wildcards.  
158  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Personal Call Handler  
Status is Idle – Whenever the station is idle and the DND button is toggled or  
whenever an ACD agent ends “wrap-up” time and becomes available to take  
a call.  
Do Not Disturb Status – Select whether the station is to be considered idle  
when the DND Status is...  
ACD Agent Status – Check the box to trigger when an agent goes idle  
after completing the “wrap-up”.  
Change in DND Status – Whenever the DND or message status change  
takes place, the message set is checked to see if it matches the defined  
conditions.  
Do Not Disturb Change – Select the DND Status change to cause the  
trigger. For the item with a message to match, enter the beginning  
characters of the message. See Like Matches and Unlike Matches for  
use of wildcards.  
Affected Phone – Select whether this rule will be based upon My  
Phone or My Secondary Extension.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Personal Call Handler  
Outlook Calendar Appointment – An event that occurs at the start time  
of the appointment and again when the appointment time ends (‘Free’).  
Calendar Status – Select to match the Outlook Calendar Status  
options: Any, Free, Busy, Out of Office.  
Event Importance – Select to match the Outlook Calendar  
Importance options: Any, Low, Normal, or High.  
Subject – Select either Any or Matches this Subject. For making  
the match enter the text for the subject to match. See Like  
Matches and Unlike Matches for use of wildcards.  
Note: Outlook Calendar may also send a ‘Tentative’ status setting which is  
treated using the ‘Any’ setting.  
Outlook Calendar Reminder – An event that occurs at the time  
scheduled for sending the reminder message for an upcoming  
appointment. This event will trigger again if the appointment time is  
changed after the Reminder event was previously given.  
Calendar Status – Select to match the Outlook Calendar Status  
options: Any, Free, Busy, Out of Office.  
Event Importance – Select to match the Outlook Calendar  
Importance options: Any, Low, Normal, or High.  
Subject – Select either Any or Matches this Subject. For making  
the match enter the text for the subject to match. See Like  
Matches and Unlike Matches for use of wildcards.  
Note: Outlook Calendar may also send a ‘Tentative’ status setting which is  
treated using the ‘Any’ setting.  
160  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Personal Call Handler  
Like Matches  
When you design a Rule to trigger using a Specific Number (for the CallerID  
number or Account number) or on a Specific Name (for the CallerID name) you  
can design the rule to either search for an exact match or a “LIKE” match. A  
“LIKE” match simply uses wildcard characters in the string that you specify to  
accept a range of values. The following wildcards are available:  
?Any single character  
*Zero or more characters  
#Any single digit (0-9)  
Example 1: To trigger on any caller from your area code 602: Set the Specific  
Number on Caller ID Number to: 602*  
Example 2: To trigger on any caller from your local office code 496: Set the  
Specific Number on Caller ID Number to: 602496?  
Example 3: To trigger on any caller with a caller ID name starting with C: Set the  
Specific Name on Caller ID name to: C*.  
Unlike Matches  
In addition, you can precede any of the search strings with the characters <> to  
request all matches that “aren't equal” or “aren't Like”.  
Example: To trigger on any caller from NOT from your area code 602: Set the  
Specific Number on Caller ID Number to: <>602*.  
3. Apply User-Defined Actions – This section will define how to apply the User-  
Defined Actions to a Personal Call Handling Rule.  
Set an Immediate Action – Pull down the listing and select the action  
to be applied immediately. Either an Immediate or a Delayed Action is  
needed for the rule to be complete.  
Set a Delayed Action – Define the number of seconds to delay the  
action and then pull down the listing and select the action to be  
applied. Both immediate and delayed actions can be performed in the  
same rule.  
To Check the Action – Clicking the Check Action button will transfer  
you to User Defined Actions to allow changing the action and/or test  
the action.  
To Add an Action – Click the Add Action button to transfer to User  
Defined Actions to allow you to create a new action to be used.  
To Delete an Action – Click the Delete Action button to remove an  
action from the listings. Use this with caution, as this will remove the  
action for all other functions as well.  
4. Complete the Rule  
To Save Rule – Click the Save button to save your changed or new  
rule.  
To Cancel Settings – Click Cancel to exit without saving the settings.  
To Export Call Handler Rule – Click the Export Rule to create a.RUI  
file in the PC user’s “C:Document and Settings\Application  
Data\Toshiba\Strata Call Manager” folder. Each rule created can be  
saved as a file for backup purposes and copying to another PC to  
allow the same rule to be used by other users.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Export Rules  
Once a rule has been designed, exporting the rule is recommended to provide a  
backup copy and that file can be copied to other Call Managers. To export a rule,  
you will need to be in the Add/Edit Rule screen and click the Export Rule button.  
Pressing Export Rule copies the details of the rule into a special file named:  
xx.RUI where 'xx' is a number assigned by the system corresponding to the rule  
number (i.e. 2.ACI).  
The file is exported into the user’s application data folder (typically,  
“C:\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Application Data\Toshiba\Strata Call  
Manager”). In order to identify the file more easily you may then want to user  
Explorer to rename that file to something more appropriate (i.e. PLAYBELL.RUI).  
When renaming a rule file always limit the file name to 8 characters prior to the  
.RUI extension. This file can then be copied to another PC to give a copy of the  
rule to another user of the Call Manager. Leaving a copy in this folder will provide  
a backup copy of the rule that will be loaded at startup of Call Manager if that rule  
had been somehow deleted in the Personal Call Handler Rules List (see  
Importing Rules below for more details).  
Note: When exporting a rule, if a file with that name already exists, an error  
message will occur and the rule will not be copied – when this occurs you  
will need to use Explorer to rename the existing file and then export  
again.  
Importing Rules  
When the Call Manager program starts up, it automatically imports rules from the  
compiled NET_PHN.RUL rules file plus all rule files (*.RUx) it finds in its startup  
folder. The last character used in the file name extension defines how the rule file  
is treated when importing:  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
.RUI – These files are individual rules created by exporting. These will be  
imported only when a rule using the same name does not exist in the  
compiled file. Thus, when this file exists and the user made changes to this  
rule, the user can revert back to the original operation by deleting the current  
rule in Call Manager then stopping and restarting Call Manager.  
.RU1 – Upon startup, Call Manager always imports rules from all “One-Shot”  
rule files (*.RU1). When a rule with the same name exists, the rule will be  
overwritten. Once imported, the One-Shot export file is deleted. These one-  
shot files can thus be used to import a rule just one time allowing the user to  
change or delete the rule as desired.  
.RUO – Upon startup, Call Manager always imports all “Over-Write” rule  
files, which overwrites any rule of the same name. These files can be useful  
to ensure the rules do not get changed or when wanting to make the same  
update on other Call Managers.  
.RU0 – These are another type of rule file that is imported only at initial startup  
of the program or when the compiled rules file “AGT_PHN.RUL” is not found  
at startup.  
These types of files allow you to design a rule, export it, rename as needed and  
then copy the exported file to all PCs that need that rule. These are also useful to  
overcome a user accidentally deleting a rule, since exiting and restarting Call  
Manager will restore that rule.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Microsoft Outlook  
14  
Dialing from within  
Outlook  
When Outlook Phone Link has been installed, a "Phone Icon" will appear on your  
Outlook main Tool bar. Then when you are in any Outlook Contacts folder and  
you have a contact highlighted, you can press this button to dial. A dialing screen  
will pop up showing each of the phone numbers available for that contact. Simply  
select the appropriate phone number and press the Call button to place the call.  
Note: Please refer to the on-line help file in Outlook Phone Link for available  
dialing options.  
When the call is being dialed in Call Manager, the name from the Contact will be  
automatically attached to the phone call (for display on the LCD, the Call Key,  
SMDR, etc).  
Incoming Calls  
Using the Personal Call Handler you can set up a rule(s) to automatically run the  
"Lookup In Outlook" action. This action will then lookup the phone number in  
Outlook and, depending on how your action is configured, will pop open a Contact  
and/or a Journal.  
Note: If you setup a rule to trigger on "When Ringing", you may NOT want to  
have the action automatically open a Contact or Journal because it will do  
this for every matching call whether you are present or not. So, if while  
you're away from your desk, you have missed 20 outside calls that rang  
on your phone, you could have 20 different Contact screens and 20  
Journal screens popped up on your PC screen. A better alternative is to  
have your "When Ringing..." trigger use Pop User Options instead of the  
Open Contact or Add Contact or Add Journal options. Now, when a call is  
ringing on your phone, a small "User Options" window will pop up showing  
the Contacts that match the phone number (if any) as well as buttons that  
let you manually "Open/Add Contact" or "Add Journal".  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Using Microsoft Outlook  
With this, you can see the information about who is calling and then can  
manually open a Contact or Journal. If opening a contact/journal manually is  
not desirable, you could also have a 2nd 'trigger/action' so that when you  
"Answered" a call it would automatically open a Contact and/or Journal as  
desired.  
While on a Call  
Whenever you are on a telephone call (incoming or outgoing) you can right-  
click on the call (Call Information or LCD Display window) and select “View  
Info” to pop up the Standard Call Info screens shown below. Within these  
screens, buttons are offered to Open Contact, create a New Contact, Lookup  
the person in Outlook, or open a Journal (Add Journal) entry in Outlook.  
These screens can also automatically pop up by setting up a Personal Call  
Handler rule using a trigger to run the "Popup Call Info Screen" action (i.e.  
whenever you answer a call). A feature may also be available to you,  
depending upon support for your system, to divert the call (Divert Call) to  
another destination.  
Contact Match found  
Contact Match not found  
164  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Microsoft Outlook  
Integrating with  
Outlook Calendar  
One typical integration with Outlook Calendar is to put Appointment information on  
DSS key so that all other Call Manager users know your current presence status.  
This example will turn on the DSS key with Status Message only and turn off the  
message when the scheduled meeting is over.  
Create Actions  
to set and clear  
the DSS  
The first Action will set a Status Message and add the Subject field of the  
Appointment as part of the message. On the DSS key, the first line and second  
line are appended to each other, thus the preset Status Message can be modified  
to become something very simple to allow for the Subject to become the  
predominant part of the message.  
Message  
The second Action will clear the message when the appoinment ending time is  
reached.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Using Microsoft Outlook  
Create Personal Call  
Handler Rules  
Two Personal Call Handler Rules will be needed, both using the Outlook  
Calendar Appointment event which sends a message when an appointment  
starts and a second when it ends. In this example, I want to trigger the setting  
of the DSS message for any Calendar Status to ensure all appointments are  
reflected and also for any Event Importance and any Subject. These items  
are part of the appointment created in Outlook Calendar. When this event  
triggers, I want to use the first Action that I created which sets a message “In  
Meeting” and appends the Subject line to the message to be displayed.  
The second rule will trigger only when the Appointment sends an indication of  
the Appointment be set to a “Free” status. The action is to turn off the DSS  
message.  
The Final PCH Rules  
The main thing is to ensure that the PCH rule to “Clear DSS Message” must  
follow “Set DSS Message”. If not, the “Set DSS Message” triggers on ‘any’  
Calendar Status including ‘Free’ and the clear command would be followed by  
a command to set the message, thus the message would never clear. The  
final set of PCH rules should be in the order of items 3 and 4 in the PCH  
Rules screen.  
166  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using Companion Applications 15  
Contacts  
The Contacts companion application tab has Directories, Presence status and  
Speed Dial combined.  
The Contacts tab lists current phone directories. Phone directories will include  
“CIX Directory” (created by default), and any personal directories that you create.  
Sorting Entries  
Click on a column header to sort the entries using that column. Click the same  
column header again to reverse the sort from ascending to descending (or vice  
versa). A small, light colored arrow in the column header indicates the current  
column used for sorting.  
Searching  
Entries  
Press the Search button (next to the Filter icon) to go into search mode. Above  
each column is a search area in which to type search criteria.  
All the entries that match the search criteria will be shown, while the rest are  
hidden.  
The default search method is “Starts with”, where only entries starting with the  
same letters as the search criteria will be shown. Other search methods are  
available, and can be accessed with the button to the left of the search area.  
Search criteria button  
Search criteria  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
CIX Directory  
List of names and extensions on the telephone system.  
To Call – Press Enter to dial the highlighted number, or double-click the  
desired name from the list.  
Drag and Drop to Create Speed Dial Button – Drag an entry from the  
Directory to a Programmable User button to automatically create a Speed  
Dial button with the selected extension number.  
Additional Options – The menu icons under the tab let you access other  
functions:  
Note: Not all options may be available due to the settings for the tab.  
Call Now – Place a phone call to this person or extension. (Same  
as double-clicking.)  
Edit – Allows you to Add, Change, Delete, and Copy entries  
(typically available only in the Personal directory).  
Print Listing – Print a listing of all entries shown in the directory.  
Change the position and width of the columns to format the  
printout as desired. Use Filters and Find to print only the entries  
you want.  
Export Listing – Export the listing using either a CSV or Text  
format.  
Chat – Initiate a chat call to the person at this extension  
(Extension directory only, target must have Chat installed and  
running.)  
Filtering Entries – Many PBX systems use default names for unassigned  
extensions. You many not want these unnecessary entries in the  
Directory, so Call Manager provides a Filter to remove certain items from  
the list.  
Press the Filters  
button to access the  
Directory Filters  
screen.  
Enable the Hide Names option  
to enable the filter.  
To Add a Filter Entry – Place  
the cursor in the text box.  
Type in the characters to be filtered and press Enter or click the Add  
button.  
168  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
To Delete a Filter Entry – Use the pull down list and select an entry to be  
removed and press Del.  
The filter strings are case sensitive and will hide all entries starting with exactly the  
same string of characters. Entering “A” hides all entries that begin with an  
uppercase A.  
Personal / Speed  
Dial Directory  
List of telephone numbers. The user may add entries to provide fast access to  
frequently dialed numbers.  
To Call – Press Enter to dial the highlighted number, or double-click the  
desired number from the list.  
Add by Drag and Drop from Outlook – Drag a contact from Microsoft Outlook  
to the Directory and automatically add to the list.  
Add by Drag and Drop from Call History – Drag a number from the “Call  
History” window to the Directory to add the number to the list.  
Drag and Drop to Create Speed Dial Button – Drag an entry from the Directory  
to a Programmable User button to automatically create a speed dial button  
with that phone number.  
Additional Options – Right-click on the entry to access a menu of other  
functions:  
Call Now – Place a phone call to this person or extension. (Same as double-  
clicking.)  
Edit – Allows you to Add, Change, Delete, and Copy entries (typically  
available only in the Personal directory).  
Lookup in Outlook – Lookup this number in Microsoft Outlook and open the  
matching contact.  
Print Listing – Print a listing of all entries shown in the directory. Change the  
position and width of the columns to format the printout as desired. Use Filters  
and Find to print only the entries you want.  
Export Listing – Export the listing using either a CSV or Text format.  
Presence Viewer  
This capability is integrated in the Contacts companion application tab. Click on a  
Group tab within Contacts. Note that you can create as many groups as needed.  
You can look at the Presence status of members in each group.  
To add a Group  
1. Select by clicking on the My Groups or System Groups tab.  
2. Right click and select Create New Group.  
Note: The different between “My Groups” and “System Groups” is that “My  
Groups” is personal and you can create their own. “System Groups”  
applies to all and only a user with “Admin” right can create and change  
the group entry.  
To manage the Presence Viewer  
1. Click the Group tab assigned for the Presence Viewer.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
2. Right click on an entry for options to either call, chat, broadcast, edit or  
delete group.  
3. When you select Edit group, the following dialog box displays. Use the  
double arrow buttons to add or remove users from the group (shown  
right).  
To use view Presence Status  
170  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
The Presence status shows the status of users, such as Idle, Busy, etc.  
Right click the member to start Chat or call the person through Call Manager.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
History  
Call Manager automatically creates a log of calls dialed and received on the  
local telephone extension. This Call History provides the user with a valuable  
log of his or her phone calls.  
Page Buttons  
Pages Buttons – In addition to the other toolbar icons, you can use the  
First Page, Previous Page, Next Page, and Last Page icons/buttons to  
navigate between the various pages. Call History creates Pages when  
the call log exceeds a certain number of Call records to improve  
performance. The Last page contains the most recent calls.  
Call Information – Each call in the call history appears as one line in the  
Call Display area. The column headers indicate what information is  
shown in each column.  
Column 1 (Icons) – Indicates whether or not a call is an incoming  
call or outgoing call (arrow pointing right = incoming, arrow  
pointing left = outgoing) and the call is answered or not (Green =  
answered, pink = not answered).  
Year Day Time – Shows the date and time that the call completed  
(not started). This column also includes the day-of-week for the  
first call of each day.  
Phone – the phone number you dialed (outgoing,) or the CallerID  
Number / ANI (incoming.)  
Name – The name of the person you called (based on Outlook),  
or who called you (based on CallerID.)  
Dur –The Duration or length of time the call spent on this Call  
Manager extension, in hours, minutes, and seconds. This time  
does not include any time the call spent on any other extensions  
before or after being on this extension.  
Acct Code – Shows the account code, if any, that was attached to  
this call. Customers often use Account Codes to indicate  
something about the call, such as the Customer ID, the result  
code of the call (i.e. “order was placed”, “needs follow-up”,  
“unable to reach – party was busy”), etc. This account code could  
have been attached to the call prior to reaching this phone, or it  
could have been added or changed by you while it was on your  
extension. Call History logs the current Account Code when the  
call leaves the Call Manager extension.  
172  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Type – This can either be IC or CO indicating the type of call, internal  
or external. It also indicates the Station (ACD/Hunt Group,  
Announcement (AA), and voicemail.  
Notes – Shows the ‘Notes’ that were taken during this call. These  
Notes could have been attached to the call prior to reaching this  
phone, and/or they could have been added or changed by you while it  
was on your extension. Call History logs the current set of Notes  
when the call leaves the Call Manager extension.  
To Call – Double-click the desired number from the list.  
Drag and Drop to Call – You can select a call and then use your mouse to  
drag and drop it to either the Call window or the LCD Display to start the  
dialing of that number.  
Drag and Drop to Create Speed Dial Button – You can select a call and then  
use your mouse to drag and drop it to a Call Manager button.  
Drag and Drop to Add to Speed Dial List – You can select a call and then use  
your mouse to drag and drop it to your Personal Directory.  
Additional Options – Right-click on the entry to access a menu of other  
functions:  
Call Now – Dial the phone number using Call Manager.  
View Info – Provides a read-only view of all of the information about  
the call, including the “Notes.”  
Note: You cannot change this information – you can view and copy/paste it to  
other applications.  
Lookup in Outlook – Look up the telephone number in Microsoft  
Outlook and open any matching Contact.  
Listen to Call – When the Tracer Integration is provided, this button  
provides a link to Replay to allow the recording to be played back.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
The following functions are available on the toolbar:  
Find Similar Calls (Filter icon) – Enables the Filters option pre-  
configured with information to match the selected call. This is  
very useful for finding calls made to or received from a certain  
person or phone number.  
Print Calls (Printer icon) – Prints a listing of all entries shown in  
Call History. Change the position and width of the columns prior  
to printing to format the printout as desired.  
Export Listing (Export icon) – Export the listing to either a CSV,  
Text, Excel or Text format.  
Filtering – Use filters to limit the number of calls or view a certain type of  
calls. For example, you might want to see only the calls you made/  
received in the last 7 days. Or you want to see all Outgoing calls made to  
a specific area code since the first of the year.  
1. Press the “Filters” icon to open the Call History Filters screen.  
Note: The filters button changes from Grey to Green when filters are active.  
This serves as a reminder that the call display list may not display all  
call records while filters are active.  
2. Select the options and data for the calls that you want to see.  
Dates – Select the date(s) – “All” means any date.  
Call Direction – Choose whether you want to see incoming (“In  
Only”), outgoing (“Out Only”), or all calls (“In & Out”.)  
Phone Numbers – Choose “All” for calls made to/from any  
number. Use the “Matching” option to limit the search to calls  
made to/from specific numbers. You can enter a specific phone  
number (like 480-496-9040,) the last part of a number (496-  
9040,) or the first part of a number (480+) to find all matching  
calls. You may also use wild cards, such as: 480-???-9040 and  
480-496*.  
Names – Choose “All” for calls to/from any name including blank  
names. Use the “Starting with” option to limit the search to calls  
with a specific name. Enter an entire name (Jack Jones) or just  
the first part of a name (Jac). The name search is NOT case  
sensitive.  
Account Codes – Choose “All” for calls with any or no account  
code. Use the “Starting with” option to limit the search to calls  
matching or starting with a specific account code. For example,  
‘123’ returns calls with account codes 123 and 123xxx.  
174  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
3. Press the Search button to find the calls (on the current page) that match ALL  
of the selected options. Call History will update the “Calls” counter and “Call  
Display” area on the main screen.  
Search Button – Finds the calls (on the current page) that match ALL of the  
selected filtering options.  
Clear Filters Button – Resets all filters to ‘Off”. Press Search to re-load all Call  
History record. Or, select new filter settings and start a new Filter search.  
Cancel Button – Closes the filters screen with no update to the “Calls  
Display”.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
ACD Viewer  
The Call Manager ACD Viewer program allows Call Manager users  
connected to Strata ACD to view the status of all ACD groups in which they  
are members. It shows the operating status of each group and as the group  
becomes busier it changes colors and can provide warning sounds to alert  
you of status changes. You can expand each group view to see the number  
of calls and the status of each of the agents and supervisors in the group.  
Each group contains a “My Status” icon showing your own status in the group  
(logged in, logged out, busy, in wrap-up, etc.), and when you right-click on  
your icon you can change your status.  
The ACD Viewer is fully integrated with the Call Manager Chat so you can  
easily place a chat call to a supervisor or another agent by simply right-  
clicking on that person’s icon. Plus you can broadcast a chat notification to all  
agents and supervisors in the group.  
ACD Viewer appears by default as a companion application tab.  
Note: Strata ACD must be operating in Enhanced Mode for ACD Viewer to  
be used.  
The ACD actions can be used to Log In / Log Out to/from ACD groups. Going  
temporarily unavailable and an ability to end wrap times can be part of the  
features available. Additional Call Center features are possible using User  
Programmable buttons.  
176  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Logging In or  
Out  
Click the Change Agent ID icon to open the ACD Login/Logout window.  
Note: The right list box shows available groups for the identified agent number.  
The left list box shows groups currently logged into.  
To log into or out of one or more groups  
1. Highlight the group name(s) in the right-hand box and click <<Log In. If your  
Agent ID is listed as a Supervisor, then the Supervisor: Take Calls check box  
will be offered on your screen. Placing a check in this box will log you in to  
take calls for the group(s) selected when <<Log In was pressed.  
2. Click Done when finished.  
3. The ACD Key will display the number of ACD groups the extension is logged  
into and the total number of ACD groups you are a member.  
To Log Out  
1. Highlight the group name(s) in the left-hand box and click the >>Log Out  
button.  
2. Click Done when finished.  
Changing Agent Status  
1. Right click My Status once you have expanded the views in the ACD Viewer  
pane. The following ACD Agent Status window will appear:  
To Make Agent Unavailable  
1. Use pull-down list and choose a reason.  
2. Click the Make Unavailable button.  
3. Click Done.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
To Make Agent Available  
1. Click the Make Available button.  
2. Click Done.  
To Set the ACD Status to WrapUp  
1. Click Set WrapUp button.  
2. Click Done.  
Note: The Set WrapUp button is NOT available on all installations.  
To End WrapUp  
1. Click the ACD Status button.  
2. Click the End WrapUp button.  
3. Click Done.  
The ACD View has many configuration options that allow you to customize it  
to your needs. When the ACD Viewer is operating and visible you can  
configure it’s settings by clicking on the wheel icon in the upper left hand  
corner and selecting the Setup menu.  
178  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
ACD Group  
Status  
This section allows you to setup how ACD viewer changes ACD group status  
based on activity conditions. Different colors represent the different status  
conditions of (how busy is) each ACD group. Yellow and Red represent warning  
and urgent status levels respectively and can be specifically configured to decide  
when those levels should be reached.  
Urgent Status (Red)  
This is the highest level status of a queue and should typically be reached when  
the load or conditions in the ACD queue indicates a problem that needs attention.  
You can select up to two conditions so that whenever either of these conditions  
are met the ACD Group Status button will turn Red. In addition to these two  
conditions, this status will automatically be reached whenever the queue is  
enabled but there are NO agents available. Available conditions are:  
Calls Waiting > ’x’ calls  
Longest Waiting Call > ’x’ Secs  
Waiting Calls / Agent > ’x’ %  
Warning Status  
(Yellow)  
This is the 2nd highest level status of a queue and should typically be reached  
when the load in the ACD queue is approaching a problem level. You can select  
up to two conditions so that whenever either of these conditions are met the ACD  
Group Status button will turn Yellow. The available conditions are:  
Calls Waiting > ’x’ calls  
Longest Waiting Call > ’x’ Secs  
Waiting Calls / Agent > ’x’ %  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Active Status (Green), Idle  
Status (Blue), and  
The ACD Group Status will automatically appear Green if there are agents  
logged into the group and there are calls taking place in the group, but there  
are no waiting calls for the group. The status will automatically appear Blue  
when there are agents available to take ACD calls, but there are no calls.  
Black indicates the queue is Disabled (or off-schedule) and not receiving  
calls.  
Disabled Status (Black)  
Notifications  
This section allows you to setup audible and visible notifications that can be  
taken when an Urgent, Warning, and Active status is met. If desired, enter a  
checkmark in the Play Sound box to hear a sound over the speakers on your  
PC when a status is met. Use the Browse button to browse to a specific wav  
file. Use the test button to hear the selected sound. Enter a checkmark in the  
box if you’d like to Show the ACD Viewer if it is hidden on your screen when a  
Status is met. This will bring the Call Manager and the ACD Viewer to the  
forefront of your screen.  
Click Save to save all changes.  
180  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
CM LCD  
In some cases you may want to keep the ACD viewer hidden but have it send  
messages to the LCD display of the Call Manager to show the ACD queues  
status. This is often very useful when the Call Manager is docked to the screen  
and you want to conserve screen space for use by other applications. Thus, ACD  
Viewer can be configured to send Low/Medium/High priority messages to scroll  
along the 2nd line of the Call Manager LCD display.  
Select the appropriate check box to indicate whether or not you’d like to display a  
message when each ACD Group Status condition has been met.  
Enter the text you’d like to display for the Urgent, Warning, or Background  
Messages.  
Enter the text exactly as you’d like it displayed in the Call Manager. Use the  
following tokens to represent ACD Group information.  
ACD Viewer Tokens  
%G – ACD Pilot Extension  
%L – Longest Waiting Call  
%W – ACD Group Name  
% % – Percent Sign  
%Q – # of Waiting Calls  
%Z – Calls per agent  
%Y – # of Agents Available  
%C – Total Calls  
%X – Total Agents  
%G Urgent Message %Q Waiting Calls: Longest Waiting Call: %L  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Miscellaneous  
If on your system each Agent ID is the same as his/her PBX extension you  
should enable the “PBX extensions correspond to Agent IDs” option. That is  
agent ID “100” uses PBX extension “100”, agent ID “105” uses PBX extension  
“105, etc. With this type of installation, you will be able to place a chat call  
(or chat broadcast message) to an agent even when he/she is not Logged In  
to an ACD group.  
Using ACD Viewer  
Collapsed View  
This section describes how to use the ACD Viewer for both agents and  
supervisors.  
The ACD Viewer starts out with a ‘collapsed’ view of each ACD queue. This  
takes up very little screen space but still provides a high-level status of each  
of your ACD groups. That is, the ACD Status View window displays one line  
for each of the ACD Groups of which you are a member. The ACD Group  
Name, Queue Number, and Status (Enabled or Disabled) are displayed. If the  
queue is on a schedule, the time the queue will be enabled/disabled by the  
schedule is displayed.  
Each ACD queue has an activity LED that changes colors based on the status  
of the queue:  
Gray (Idle) = no calls active (or waiting) and at least 1 agent logged-in and  
available.  
Green (Active) = at least one call active but no calls waiting and at least one  
agent logged-in and available.  
Yellow (Warning) = Default: one call waiting and at least one agent logged in.  
But this threshold is configurable.  
Red (Urgent) = Default: Two or more calls waiting OR no agents logged-in  
and available. But this threshold is configurable.  
182  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Black (Disabled) = the ACD queue is disabled (either by a supervisor or by being  
after-hours in the schedule).  
To expand’ the information on an ACD group, simply click on the Plus sign next to  
the status icon. Other things you can do to a queue via right-click menu include:  
Chat Broadcast – Send a broadcast chat message to all agents and supervisors  
in the queue.  
Enable Queue – Enable the queue 24x7 if currently disabled. (Supervisor only)  
Disable Queue – Disable the queue if it is currently enabled. (Supervisor only)  
Use Schedule – Enable the queue using the Schedule for the queue. (Supervisor  
only) *The schedule days/times are setup in Strata ACD.  
Expanded View  
When you want to see more detailed information on an ACD queue, you can  
change to the ’expanded’ view. As mentioned previously, to ’expand’ the  
information on an ACD group, simply click on the Plus sign in the status LED or  
right-click the group and select ’Expand’ menu. In this view you see a more  
detailed view of: (1) Calls in the queue, (2) other Agents and Supervisors in the  
group and (3) your own status.  
1. The “Calls” line shows the current number of Active and Waiting calls in queue  
as well as how long the longest call has been waiting (displayed as LCW for  
“Longest Call Waiting”).  
2. The “Agents” line shows how many total agents are in the ACD Group as well  
as a breakdown showing the number of Idle, Busy, Unavailable, and Logged  
Off agents. By clicking on the Plus sign you can further expand the view to  
show each agent’s ID, Name, and Status. Plus the status of each Supervisor  
is also shown in this list. Right-click on an agent or supervisor in the ACD  
Group to send them a Chat message, or if you are idle, to Call the agent or  
supervisor on the phone.  
3. The last line in the expanded view is the “My Status” line. This not only shows  
your personal status in this ACD group but allows you to change your status  
and perform functions using right-click menus as described in the following  
section.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
In the expanded view, the “My Status” icon is a special icon that shows your  
status in the ACD group (logged in, logged out, busy, in wrap-up, etc.), and  
when you right-click on your icon you can change your status or perform a  
function. The options provided are:  
Log In – this will log you into this ACD group.  
Log In and Take Calls – (supervisor only) – This allows a supervisor to  
simultaneously log in as a supervisor and as an agent (to take calls).  
Log Out – this will log you out of this ACD group.  
Make Me Available – If you are set to ’unavailable’ or are in ’wrap-up’, this  
will change you to ’available’ status.  
Make Me Unavailable – you can select this to make yourself ’unavailable’  
– a list of unavailable message choices will be provided.  
Request Help Call to Supervisor – while you are on an ACD call, you can  
use this to initiate a request for a help call to a supervisor in the ACD  
group. This is further explained below.  
184  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Requesting  
Supervisor Help  
When the Request Help Call to Supervisor function is selected, this sends a Help  
Request to a supervisor in the ACD Group. Once you initiate the request you will  
receive a notification that the request has been sent.  
If the supervisor accepts your request for help you will receive notification.  
If the supervisor denies your request you will receive a rejection notification.  
If a supervisor or supervisors do not respond to your request you will see the  
following:  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Chat  
The Call Manager Chat program allows Call Manager users connected to the  
Net Server to interactively have chat conversations. This is an integrated text-  
messaging function that lets you communicate with other Call Manager users  
using text messaging ‘calls’ even while you’re busy on the phone.  
This program works as a companion program with Call Manager to allow  
workers in the enterprise to communicate using real time text-based  
communications with others. Using Call Manager Chat you can have  
individual conversations with anyone else on the sever with the same feature  
installed.  
Chat can also be used to send a broadcast message to an individual or to an  
entire group. A broadcast message is a one-time message that will appear on  
the recipient’s Chat window.  
Chat Operation  
The primary function of Call Manager Chat is to allow you to place and  
receive chat calls and conduct one-on-one chat conversations with other chat  
users in your company. Chat also contains some features that may make  
Chat more user friendly in certain applications. These include a Do Not  
Disturb, changing the “quick send” text buttons, and the ability to form groups  
of users for broadcast messages,  
Using Chat  
Messaging  
This section defines how to place a call to another Chat user, how to  
communicate with that person, how to answer an incoming Chat  
communication, and how to send Broadcast messages.  
To Access Chat – Click the Chat tab on Call Manager. The following  
screen will display.  
186  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
To Place a Chat Call  
1. Choose whom to send a message to by expanding a group in the main Chat  
window. If someone has logged out of Call Manager Chat the icon will appear  
in gray, and it will show Off Line and the date and time they went off line. You  
cannot place a chat call to someone who is off line. The offline time is the last  
known offline time. If Call Manager was not running and a user went offline,  
the offline time will not show.  
Note: If you do not want to receive a Chat response you can send a Broadcast  
Message.  
You can receive a response to a broadcast by selecting the 'Give "Chat  
Back" option' in the broadcast dialog.  
2. Double click on the person with whom you wish to converse  
or Right click and choose Chat Call from the menu.  
This will bring up a Silent Message Conversation window, which is used  
to send and receive messages opening a chat conversation. Chat can  
only be between two users. You cannot have a multi-way chat (more than  
two users). You can have multiple two-way chat conversations.  
To Answer a Chat Call  
1. A Silent Message Conversation window will automatically pop up showing  
who is calling you and a sound will play based upon your Preference Settings.  
2. You must respond within 30 seconds to this message or the caller will get a  
message “User did not respond. However, the 30 seconds setting is  
configurable.  
3. Ongoing conversations follow those described in To Send a Text Messageand  
Options During a Chat Conversation.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
To Send a Text Message  
1. Press a pre-programmed Response button or  
Type the message into the text box at the bottom of the window and press  
either the Send button or the Enter key on your keyboard (shown below).  
Options During a Chat Conversation  
Several options are available to the user when right clicking within the  
conversation window to open a menu of options. The chat window contains  
three windows: the Chat Box, the Canned Replies, and the Whiteboard.  
The whiteboard may not be visible in the chat window (it depends on  
configuration). The three windows are accessed from the view menu.  
To Call the Person using your Phone  
This option is to make it more convenient when you need to speak with the  
person rather than just sending text.  
Click Chat tab, then Phone. Enter the phone number or if the  
number is automatically populated, then click Call.  
To Copy the Conversation  
From the Edit menu, click either Copy or Copy All to copy the  
highlighted or all of the conversation to the Windows Clipboard  
for pasting into another application.  
To End the Conversation  
Press the Close button to end the conversation.  
188  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
To Open a Whiteboard (Collaborative) Session  
Click Share Whiteboard Screen. This option is only offered once the  
called party has responded to the Chat session.  
To Send a  
Broadcast  
Message  
Call Manager Chat allows you to send a broadcast message to one or more Chat  
recipients. For example, if the Sales Manager would like to call a meeting with all  
of his sales representatives, he could use this feature to send a message to the  
Sales Group telling them there is an important meeting in 15 minutes in the  
conference room.  
1. To initiate a broadcast message, double click on any group name in the Chat  
Window and click on the Broadcast icon or  
Right click on any group name or select Broadcast.  
2. Enter a message into the Message box.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
3. Define the Urgency, Normal or Urgent for the message delivery.  
When Normal is selected, the Broadcast message is sent to your recipient(s)  
in black text and when Urgent is selected the text is in red (shown below).  
4. Define the Destination Options:  
A checkmark in the Timeout (default choice) will display the  
message for the number of seconds defined in the time box  
(default is 60 seconds).  
Entering a checkmark in the Give “Chat Back” option box will give  
your recipients the option to send a Chat message back to you  
once they receive your Broadcast Message.  
NoteBe aware that when using the "Chat Back" option sending to a  
group of people, all recipients will have the Chat back option  
and if everyone responds, it could result in a large number of  
simultaneous chat calls back to you.  
5. Click Send.  
190  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Chat Feature  
Operation  
Do Not Disturb  
The Chat Do Not Disturb (DND) feature is disabled by default. For this feature to  
operate, the “Enable Do Not Disturb” feature must be selected in the Features Tab  
of Chat Setup. This feature works independent of Call Manager’s DND. See  
“Interfacing with Other Programs” on page 200 for details on how to automatically  
link the Chat DND status with Call Manager.  
To Set Do Not Disturb  
When you want to prevent further incoming chat calls, the Do No Disturb feature  
can be turned on. This feature allows you to provide a specific message, such as  
“In a Meeting Until 3pm”, to anyone attempting to place a chat call to you.  
To go into DND status DND is set in the chat toolbar by selecting the DND  
checkbox and/or entering text into the textbox on the toolbar.  
While in Do No Disturb the main window will show the text DND On in red.  
Other Users Experience – When a Chat call is placed to someone who has  
their Do Not Disturb feature set you will see a message showing “User Not  
Available” along with any return message they provided. If they didn’t setup a  
return message, the text “Do Not Disturb” will be shown.  
To Clear Do Not Disturb  
To Clear the DND Status Clear the DND checkbox..  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Response Buttons  
All buttons can be changed on-line from the Silent Message Conversation  
window. The first 8 buttons can have their responses defined in Chat Settings;  
all others can only be defined using the following procedure.  
To Add/Change Text in Response Buttons  
Right click on the button and a drop down menu appears. Select Edit to  
edit the button. The dialog box shown below appears. You can change  
the caption, the type, the text, and whether to send immediately.  
Caption – Type in a caption for the button.  
When Button is Pressed – Select what the button will do when  
pressed by choosing one of the following:  
Send Text – will send a text string to the other party on the chat  
call.  
Push URL – will send a URL to the other party on the chat call  
and pop open a web browser window to that URL. However, the  
pop open url can be disabled by the receiver.  
Send Text Message Immediately – Check the box if you are  
sending text and you would like to send it immediately, without  
clicking on the Send button.  
Click OK to save the changes you have made to your Response  
Button.  
192  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Personal Groups  
To Add or Change a Personal Group  
Right click a group name in the Chat window and choose either Add a New  
Group or, if offered, Change this Group to create a personal group. Name the  
group and add or remove names for that group as follows:  
Chat List Name – Enter a name for the group to identify your group.  
All names must be unique.  
Chat Clients in List – To add members to your group, highlight  
individuals you want to be part of your group in the All On-Line Chat  
Clients box and then click on the left double arrow (<<) button to  
move the members to the Chat Clients in List box. To select multiple  
individuals, hold down your Ctrl or Shift key while making selections  
by clicking the mouse. If you want to add a member that is not  
presently on-line, right-click your mouse in the "Chat Clients in List"  
and select the "Add an OFF-line client" menu item, then type in the  
name of the client.  
NoteThe name of the client must exactly match the client name when he/  
she is on-line. To remove members from your group simply  
highlight the members and then click on the right double arrow key  
(>>).  
Click on Save when done.  
To Copy a Group to Create a New Group  
To create a new group by copying another group, select the group to be  
copied, right-click on the group and select Copy this Group. Follow the same  
process for creating a new group above.  
To Delete A Personal Group  
To delete a group, right-click the group in the Chat List and choose the Delete  
Group option. A confirmation box will appear and needs to be affirmed before the  
group is actually deleted.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Whiteboard  
Operation  
To access the Whiteboards option, from the View menu, select Whiteboard.  
This window provides tools for sharing information on each of your PCs with  
the another user with an open Chat conversation.  
Whiteboard Menus  
The menus on the whiteboard are context sensitive.  
The File and View menus remain constant. The  
whiteboard is accessed from the View menu. The  
whiteboard menus are accessed by right clicking in  
the Whiteboard space or by clicking Whiteboard. Use  
the Whiteboard menu to capture screens, crop  
pictures, scale, highlight color, and change pen  
widths.  
The file menu has the following options:  
Open - takes you to an Open window to find a  
file, etc to share.  
Close - closes the whiteboard application.  
Save as - lets you save the whiteboard.  
Send as email - brings up an email message  
window, where the whiteboard is attached as a  
.jpg file and you can add you contacts in the To  
and cc fields.  
Set as wallpaper  
Print - prints the whiteboard  
Exit.  
Similar to the above, you can use the Edit menu to cut, copy, edit, paste,  
delete, clear and clear highlighting.  
The View menu contains Chat Box, Canned Replies, and Whiteboard.  
194  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Drag and Drop Files  
Files can be shared using the Whiteboards. A file such as a .JPG file can be  
dragged onto the White Board window and the image will display on the other’s  
shared window. Also, other files can also be shared such as Word documents.  
These files will be shared and require an appropriate application on the other PC  
to open that file. For example, if Word is running on the other PC, the Word  
document will open on the other PC. The user will be capable of using the Pen  
Tool to mark areas on the document when viewing the White Board screen. To  
make changes on the document requires switching to Word, editing the  
document, saving the file and then sending the edited copy back to the originator.  
Send Whiteboards as  
Email...  
Using this tool opens your e-mail service on your PC, takes a snapshot of the  
Whiteboards, including all pen marks, and attaches the image as a JPG file to the  
new e-mail message. You then can address the e-mail; create a subject and type  
a message to go along with the attached file.  
Save Whiteboards  
Save As...  
Using this tool causes a snapshot of the Whiteboards to be saved as a JPG file.  
The screen opens to a “Save” window to allow you to choose the file name and  
location for the file to be saved. The default location is under your “...Documents  
and Settings/<user name>/Local Settings/Application Data/Toshiba/Strata Call  
Manager”.  
Whiteboards  
Setup  
The Chat application Setup menu provides access to the Whiteboards  
Preferences screen in the Features tab.  
Highlighting – The Whiteboards Preferences screen defines a default  
Pen Width and Color to be used when Whiteboards session is  
opened. During a communication session, these can be changed at  
will as described above.  
Whiteboard  
Preferences  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Configuring Chat  
You configure Chat by making parameter choices in the Setup dialog box. You  
can make Chat integrate with other applications including your soft phone by  
using the DDE Interface commands. These are defined in the “Interfacing with  
Other Programs” on page 200 section later. Examples are provided for using  
these commands with Call Manager are also included.  
Setup  
To set up your preferences, click the Setup button.  
Messages Tab  
These settings define the arrival responses provided for incoming and  
broadcast messages.  
On Incoming Message  
Dismiss new popup window – Check the box and specify the  
time (in seconds) when no response is seen when a new  
message arrives. This will tell Chat to notify the caller of no  
response after a certain length of time. The response message  
returned is “User didn’t respond.”  
Play Wave file – Check the box to play a WAV file each time a  
new message comes in. Click on Browse to specify a different  
WAV file. You can test your WAV file by clicking on the Test  
button.  
Beep on Each New Line Received – Check the box to have  
Chat beep each time a new line arrives into the conversation.  
Click Test to verify operation.  
Timestamp Each Line – Check the box to show a time stamp  
Message Box each time a new message is received.  
196  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
On Incoming Broadcast Message  
Normal Message – Check box next to “Play Wave file:” to allow  
playing a WAV file each time a new broadcast message comes in.  
You can click on Browse to specify which WAV file you want to play.  
You can test your WAV file by clicking on the Test button below the file  
name.  
Urgent Message – Check box next to “Play Wave file:” to allow  
playing a WAV file each time an urgent broadcast message comes in.  
You can click on Browse to specify which WAV file you want to play.  
You can test your WAV file by clicking on the Test button below the file  
name.  
Response Buttons Tab  
The Response Buttons are a series of buttons located at the bottom of the Chat  
Message Window. These can be customized to meet your specific needs by  
clicking on these buttons to send immediate messages to someone without typing  
or clicking the Send button. Once a communication channel is established, you  
just click the Response Button with the message you want to send.  
Define the Number of rows to create response buttons.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
To Change Message in Response Buttons  
NoteOnly the first eight Response Buttons can be changed from the  
Preferences window. All buttons can be changed on-line when  
in a conversation. The procedure to change a button is  
identical in the Preferences Window as when done on-line.  
Click the Setup icon in the Chat application, then click on the Response  
Buttons tab.  
Click the button to change and the “Response Button” window will  
appear:  
Caption – Enter a caption for the button.  
When Button is Pressed – Select what the button will do when  
pressed by choosing one of the following:  
Send Text – will send a text string to the other party on the chat  
call.  
Push URL – will send a URL to the other party on the Chat call  
and pop open a Web Browser window to that URL.  
Send Text – Type in the text message or URL you want to send  
when you click on this button. Your text message can be any  
length in size.  
Send Text Message Immediately – Check the box if you are  
sending text and you would like to send it immediately,  
without clicking on the Send button.  
Click OK to save the changes you have made to your Response Button.  
198  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Features Tab  
In the Features tab, two features can be enabled and the location where the  
settings will be saved is specified.  
Features  
Allow Others to Push a URL to me – Check to allow URL’s to be  
pushed to this location by others. When disabled, other users cannot  
push a URL to open a browser window on your PC.  
Enable Do-Not-Disturb Feature – Enter a check mark in the box to  
enable the Do-Not-Disturb option. This option allows you to block  
incoming Chat messages and returns a DND message that you  
specify to the caller.  
Show Offline Users in <<Everyone>> – Check (default setting) to  
show both online and offline users in the <<Everyone>> group.  
Remove the checkmark to only show online users.  
Save Setting  
Save As Local Machine Data – Click to enable this option if the  
settings are to apply to all users of this PC.  
Save As Current User Data – Click to enable this option if the  
settings are unique for each user of this PC.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Logging Tab  
The logging tab window is used to enable the logging of all conversations to a  
file and define how the file is to be named.  
Log Silent Message Conversations To a File  
Auto Logging Enabled – Enter a check mark in the box to log all  
Chat conversations to a file. If you do not wish to log the  
conversations to a file take the checkmark out of this box.  
View Log Button – Click the View Log button to view your  
current log file.  
Log Filename: – Enter a file name or click on Browse to select  
where you would like your files to be logged.  
Use the variable %d to log the conversation to a file name that  
includes the date. For example, if you had a Chat conversation  
on November 3, 1999, you file name would be 110399.log.  
Use %t for the time. The user will end up with a separate file for  
each chat.  
Use the variable %u to log a conversation to the file name of the  
user that you conversed with. For example, if you had a  
conversation with January your file name would be Jan.log.  
You can combine the use of the variables if desired. For example,  
the log file name could be C:\PROGRAM  
FILES\CTS\CHAT\%d%u.log. The log files will be defined first by  
date, then by the name of the Chat party. Reversing the  
parameters (..%u%d.log) would be organized by name then date.  
Interfacing with  
Other Programs  
Call Manager Chat is designed to operate with other Windows applications.  
For example, a user of a phone program, such as Call Manager, may want to  
press a button to immediately open a chat window with your ACD supervisor  
when you're on an Urgent Call. Or you may want to coordinate the DND  
settings of your phone with the DND of Chat. Or you may need to periodically  
send a broadcast message to a group of people based upon a trigger such as  
a meeting reminder. These types of operations are supported by a DDE  
Command interface. This section defines the format for the DDE Command  
Interface, its supported commands with examples with how they can be used.  
200  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Format of the  
DDE Command  
Interface  
Other programs can be setup to send DDE commands to trigger actions in Chat to  
perform a set of functions. The basic format for this DDE command is as follows:  
Application Name: MSGPOP  
Topic: SYSTEM  
DDE Execute String: <Command>  
Command 1 – Open a  
Chat Session with this  
Extension Number  
Format: CALLEXT, Ext #, Msg_Type, "Message", Send_Option where:  
CALLEXT = The command name.  
Ext # = the extension number of the person to chat with. If you leave  
this blank, the main Chat window will pop up and allow you to  
manually select the person.  
Msg_Type = leave blank, future feature.  
“Message” = Message to be sent. When using Call Manager, call and  
system variables can be used in the message.  
Send_Option = I or C  
I – send message immediately  
C (or blank) – type message into user buffer but wait for user to  
press SEND  
Example: The user sits at the front door and acts as the receptionist and needs to  
inform people when someone is waiting in the lobby.  
1. In Call Manager create a User Defined Action using the type Send  
DDE Msg and name it appropriately.  
In App Name|Topic enter: MSGPOP|SYSTEM  
In DDE Message enter: CALLEXT,,,"Your visitor is waiting in the  
Lobby",I  
NoteNo extension was specified to allow the person to choose whom the  
message is to be sent.  
2. Choose a key on Call Manager, right-click and select Change Key.  
Name the key, choose the colors, and select a type as User Defined  
Actions. Select “Visitor Waiting” from the list of actions and Save.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Command 2 – Open a Chat  
Session with this User  
Name  
Format: CALLNAME, "Name", Msg_Type, "Message", Send_Option where:  
CALLNAME = The command name.  
“Name” = The name of the person to chat with. This name must  
match the name used in the Chat directory. If you leave this  
blank, the main Chat window will pop up and allow you to  
manually select the person.  
Msg_Type = leave blank, future feature.  
“Message” = Message to be sent  
Send_Option = I or C  
I – send message immediately or  
C (or blank) – type message into user buffer but wait for user to  
press SEND  
Example: Agents in a Call Center want to quickly notify the supervisor that an  
abusive caller is on the phone. The supervisor’s name is Jan and the persons  
phone number (formatted for easier reading) and name should be included  
when available using Caller ID.  
1. In Call Manager create a User Defined Action using the type  
Send DDE Msg and name it appropriately.  
In App Name|Topic enter: MSGPOP|SYSTEM  
In DDE Message enter: CALLNAME,”Jan”,,"Help! I have an  
abusive call from: %J/%N",C  
2. Choose a key on Call Manager, right-click and select Change  
Key. Name the key, choose the colors, and select a type as User  
Defined Actions. Select “Notify Jan – Abusive Call” from the list of  
actions and Save.  
202  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Command 3 – Set DND  
option on or off in  
Chat  
Format: DND,DND_State,"Message" where:  
DND = The command name.  
DND_State = Enter “ON” for turning on DND or “OFF” when turning  
off DND.  
“Message” = Enter the text message to be sent to callers reaching  
this station. If the message is left blank (opening and closing quotes  
only), then the message previously used will be displayed without  
change.  
Example: The Call Manager user would like to have Chat DND follow the status  
of Call Manager’s DND status automatically when Call Manager is changed. In  
this case, Chat should be in DND when the user is in a meeting. Chat should  
reflect the same message that is seen on Call Manager DSS keys.  
1. In Call Manager create a User Defined Action using the type Send  
DDE Msg and name it appropriately.  
In App Name|Topic enter: MSGPOP|SYSTEM  
In DDE Message enter: DND,OFF,  
2. In Call Manager create another User Defined Action using the type  
Send DDE Msg and name it appropriately.  
In App Name|Topic enter: MSGPOP|SYSTEM  
In DDE Message enter: DND,ON,”In Meeting Until &U+’60””  
Note: We are using the same time parameter used for setting Call Managers  
DND which uses another User Defined Action that also includes &U=’60’  
to set the time to 60 minutes from now.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
3. In Call Manager create two Personal Call Handler Rules to trigger  
when the DND status changes causing Chat DND to follow Call  
Manager’s DND status. The two rules are shown below.  
Command 4 – Sending a  
Chat/Broadcast Message  
Format: ONESHOT, Ext #/“Name”, Urgency, “Message”, Timeout where:  
ONESHOT = The command name.  
Ext #/”Name” = The extension number or name of the individual  
or group to receive the message. Examples:  
Ext # = 1001  
“Name” = “Linda”, “<Tech Support>” or “<<Sales>>  
For Everyone = “*  
NoteThe broadcast group names must contain the < and > or << and  
>> characters as part of the name.  
Urgency = enter H if urgent message and leave blank if normal  
message.  
“Message” = The text message to be sent.  
Timeout = The number of seconds for popup to expire. If left  
blank it will be set to the default of 60 seconds.  
Example: The Tech Support Manager schedules Group Meetings with his  
staff. He wants to use Outlook to schedule the meeting and use the Outlook  
Reminder to send a Chat Broadcast to his group a few minutes before the  
meeting.  
1. In Chat a Personal Group is created containing the members of  
<Tech Support>.  
2. In Call Manager create a User Defined Action using the type  
Send DDE Msg and name it appropriately.  
In App Name|Topic enter: MSGPOP|SYSTEM  
204  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
In DDE Message enter: ONESHOT,”<Tech Support>”,H,”Group  
Meeting at &U+’15’”,60  
3. In Call Manager creates a Personal Call Handler Rule to trigger when  
a Calendar Reminder event occurs and the Subject matches Group  
Meeting. This trigger will result in the action Group Meeting Broadcast  
to be taken. The assumption is the Outlook meeting reminder is  
provided 15 minutes prior to the scheduled meeting.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Dialer  
The Dialer allows Call Manager users to easily schedule phone calls to be  
placed later. For example, when a sales representative arrives in the morning  
he may know he needs to make calls to 15 of his customers, so from MS  
Outlook he can drag/drop the contact information of all 15 of the customers  
into his Dialer. When the designated time arrives for each call to be placed the  
user will be presented with a pop-up screen alerting him it’s time to place the  
call. Once the call is finished, the user will be presented with another pop-up  
screen requesting information about whether the call was successful and if  
not whether it should called again later (for example if the party was busy).  
The Dialer tab displays all calls yet to be placed as well as calls that have  
recently been completed, plus as the status of the dialers and the phone. This  
information is shown on the main screen similar to the following:  
Main Screen  
Fly out/Fly in button – is used dock the window back to the main screen  
of Call Manager or if its already docked to hide it ‘inside’ the main screen.  
Setup – Brings up the Dialer configuration screen.  
Reset button – Puts Dialer back to its initial state.  
Enabled Checkbox – This is the checkbox in the toolbar. This box  
indicates whether the dialer is enabled. This allows the user to easily  
Enable (Start) or Disable (Stop) the entire dialer function. For example, if  
you need to take a break to do some paperwork, you could simply disable  
the power dialer until you’re ready to start making calls again.  
Add Call – Click the Add Call button to place a dialer call. The AddDialer  
box displays.  
Phone Status – this shows whether the phone is idle, busy, in Do-Not-  
Disturb, etc.  
Calls Display Area – this area shows the list of calls that have been  
placed or have yet to be placed (details below).  
Column Headers – these show what information is contained in each  
column. Using your mouse, you can resize and reposition these headers  
to customize your viewing area.  
Calls Display Area  
This area shows each call that is either (1) yet to be placed or (2) that has  
already been completed. The available columns include:  
206  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Date – this column shows the date the call is to be placed or when the call  
was completed.  
Time – this column shows the time the call is to be placed or was completed.  
Status – the status of the call. If this is blank the call is not due yet. Other  
status values include:  
Due Now – The time has arrived for this call to be placed.  
Overdue – This call has not yet been placed and it is overdue.  
Done – This call has been completed.  
DISABLED – This call is disabled. It will not be placed until it is  
enabled.  
In Progress – This call is underway.  
Name – the name of the person to be called.  
Phone – the phone number to be dialed.  
Account – this shows the account code, if any, for this call. Often an account  
code is used to indicate something about the call like: the customer ID, the  
result code of the call (i.e. “order was placed”, “needs follow-up”, “unable to  
reach – party was busy”), etc. This account code will be attached to the call  
when this call is placed.  
Subject – this column shows the ‘subject’ of the call. This information can be  
added/changed up until the call is placed, at which time this information is  
attached to the subject field of the call.  
Last Result – If the call has been placed and it is either successfully  
completed or will try again later, this field shows what happened on the last  
attempt. The user chooses these result values after each call is completed:  
Completed  
Busy  
Left a Message  
No Answer  
Wrong Number  
Functions  
When you have selected an entry in the Calls you can change the entry by simply  
double-clicking on the desired entry.  
However, if you right-click on the entry, additional menu options will appear to  
show other functions you may want to perform:  
Call Now – immediately place this call. This can be used even if the power  
dialer has been disabled.  
Edit – Allows you to Add, Change, Delete, and Copy individual entries.  
Entries can also be added using drag-and-drop and/or importing as described  
in the Adding Calls to the Dialer.  
Lookup in Outlook – lookup this number in Microsoft Outlook and open the  
matching contact.  
Print Listing – print a listing of all entries shown in the calls window. The  
position and width of the columns can be changed to format the printout as  
desired.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Sorting Entries  
To sort the entries simply click on the column header by which you desire the  
sort to occur. Click the same column header again and it will switch the sort  
from ascending to descending (or vice versa). Thus if you want to sort-by-  
name click the “Name” column header, to sort by phone number click the  
“Phone” column header, and so forth.  
Dialer Operation  
Ready to Dial  
Click the AddCall button to place a dialer call. The following screen displays.  
In the Date and Time drop down are used to set the date and time of your call.  
You also have a choice of selecting Today and Now to place a call  
immediately.  
Calls in the list that are enabled will automatically pop up a screen for the user  
indicating that it is time to place the call. This screen is “Ready to Dial” screen.  
The screen will contain the information entered into the list about the caller  
and if the optional “User-defined” Action button is enabled, then pressing this  
key can cause more information to be available about the party or trigger one  
of a number of other functions. The user has the choice of Call Now or Later.  
If later is chosen, then you will be asked for a new time after which the call will  
return to the list. Pressing Cancel will disable the call before returning the call  
to the list.  
Results  
When the call is completed, a Results dialog box appears (shown below). The  
status of the call can be changed, by default it is marked as “completed”. If the  
call needs to be placed again, checking the Try Again box will open a time  
frame for the retry (second dialog box shown below). Setting the time (an  
actual time or an elapsed time) and pressing Okay will place the call back into  
the list.  
As was done in the Ready to Dial screen, an optional “User-defined” button  
can be provided with an action to be performed at the end of the call. This  
208  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
action could be anything, but typical uses would probably be to open a Journal  
entry or pop up an after-call survey form to take notes on the call.  
Adding Calls to  
the Dialer  
Adding/Changing a  
Call Record  
Calls can be added manually, imported or use drag-and-drop techniques as  
explained below. First, a call can be manually added or changed at any time by  
double clicking on a call in the dialer list. The telephone number must be entered a  
name being called and optionally an Account Number and any Subject as needed.  
The call can be scheduled by date or elapsed time. The default date is “Today”,  
but any date can be entered or a Calendar button is provided to pick a date for the  
call. Any time can be entered or any elapsed time frame can be entered. The pull  
down list shows some common elapsed times for placing the call. The call record  
will need to be enabled to be dialed at the appointed time.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Methods for Adding Calls  
Often times you may want to add multiple calls from contact or call  
information that might be contained in other applications. The Dialer provides  
a couple of ways to accomplish this.  
Drag-and-Drop from MS Outlook  
If you are using Microsoft Outlook, you can simply select one or more of your  
contacts in your Outlook Contacts database and simple use the mouse to  
drag them over and drop them on the power dials “Calls Window”. Each  
contact will then be individually added to the power dialer allowing you to  
specify the date/time of each call to be placed.  
Drag-and-Drop from Call Manager Call History  
Often times you may want to place a call to someone you’ve called (or who  
called you) in the past. Since the Call Manager call history provides a  
complete list of all calls placed and received, you can simply find the desired  
call in the call history and use the mouse to drag-and-drop a copy over to the  
power dialer window.  
Drag-and-Drop MS Excel file  
In Microsoft Excel it is quite easy to create and keep a list of desired contacts  
and add them into the power dialer. In MS Excel simple create a spreadsheet  
210  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
with at least two columns (Name and Phone number) as shown in the following  
example.  
Then simply use “Save As” and save the file as a “Text (Tab delimited)” file, as  
shown in the following window. Note: The “CSV (comma delimited)” format can  
also be used.  
Then in windows explorer simple drag this file into the power dialer window and all  
the contacts will be immediately added to the power dialer list of calls. Note:  
Alternatively, if you save this file from MS Excel directly into the “..\PDimport” sub-  
folder of Call Manager the entries will be automatically imported into the power  
dialer .  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Drag-and-Drop Other files  
Any program that can export contacts into a “tab-delimited” or “comma-  
delimited” text file format can operate with the Dialer. Similar to the MS Excel  
file, those files can then be dragged/dropped or automatically imported into  
the power dialer.  
Goldmine Export  
The Goldmine contact management software provides a way to setup re-  
usable filters and export formats as well as a way to add a “Dialer (export)”  
button on the Goldmine screen. Using these features and the automatic  
import feature of power dialer described above it is very easy to send a list of  
Goldmine contacts directly to the power dialer to be dialed.  
Configuration  
Settings  
The Dialer provides some configuration options for the user. To view or  
change the configuration, right-click on the icon in the upper-left corner of the  
main screen and then select the “Setup” menu option. This will bring up the  
Setup window as shown below.  
Place Calls While in Do-Not-Disturb – This setting controls whether the  
power dialer should attempt to place calls if the user’s phone is in Do-Not-  
Disturb. For example the user may want to set his phone into “Do-Not-  
Disturb” mode to stop all incoming calls but still continue using the power  
dialer to place outgoing calls. Note: On some phone systems the Call  
212  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Manager cannot detect and display the Do-Not-Disturb setting of the phone,  
in which case this setting has no effect.  
Delay Between Calls – it’s often desirable to provide some “wrap-up” time  
after the last call before dialing the next call. This value is used to provide this  
time delay between calls placed by the power dialer.  
Play Sound – on a sound-equipped PC, the user may want to play a selected  
WAV file to alert him/her whenever a call is ready to be placed. This feature  
and the desired WAV file can be set up here.  
Delay Before Requesting Call Result – it’s sometimes useful to give the  
user some “wrap-up” to finish up some activity in another application before  
requesting the result of the call. This value is used to provide this time delay  
after the call ended before requesting the user to enter the result.  
Clear Out Completed Calls – When calls have been completed, they will still  
appear in the calls window, but they will be automatically cleaned-out based  
on this setting.  
Note: The Call Manager provides a “Call History” feature for more permanent  
storage of calls placed and received. The settings options are as follows:  
Hourly  
Daily  
Weekly  
Monthly  
Overdue calls – when a call is due to be placed, it will only be placed if the  
power dialer is enabled and the phone status is idle (and possibly not in Do-  
Not-Disturb). Thus, since the power dialer will wait until dialing conditions are  
true, the date/time selected for a call to be placed may pass by, and the  
settings in this area pertain to those calls:  
Calls are Overdue if more than ‘x’ minutes past due – This setting is  
used to designate how long “Due Now” calls should wait before they  
are considered to be “Overdue”.  
Place Overdue calls before “Due Now” calls – this option, when  
enabled, allows the “Over Due” calls to be placed first before the “Due  
Now” calls.  
Remove Overdue calls more than ‘x’ days past due – If the dialer is  
disabled for an excessive amount of time, the power dialer will  
automatically clean out overdue calls that are way past due as  
defined by this setting.  
Adding Action  
Buttons to  
Ready to Dial  
and Results  
Screens  
An optional user-defined button can appear on both the “Ready to Dial” and the  
“Results” screens in Dialer. To setup these buttons, go to the Call Manager main  
menu select Setup then Preferences, go into the Dialing Tab. Under the Dialer,  
enable either or both of the “Action” buttons and select the Action to be performed  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
when the button is pressed. Optionally, the label can be changed to meet your  
needs. Press Save to keep your new settings.  
Advanced Topics  
Import File format  
ASCII text files can be easily imported by the power dialer as long as the file  
format is as follows:  
One record per line with the following fields:  
Name – Required – must be non-blank  
Phone – Required – must have a minimum of 4 digits – can have  
punctuation {i.e. (480)496-9040}  
Account code – Optional  
Subject – Optional  
Date – Optional – if not provided "Today" is assumed  
Time – Optional – if not provided "Now plus 5 minutes" is  
assumed  
The fields within each record can be either Tab-delimited or comma-  
delimited, however the entire file must be one format or the other (cannot  
mix formats within a file). Comma-delimited fields can/should use  
quotation marks around any field containing a comma. For example:  
"Jones, Skip", 480-496-9040, 1111, "Sample 1,2,3"  
A maximum of 1000 records can be imported.  
Automatic Imports  
The Dialer will automatically import any file in the above-described format if  
the file is  
(1) named with ".TXT" suffix and (2) saved into the “\PDimport” sub-folder in  
the Call Manager folder. Once the file is imported, it will immediately be  
deleted.  
214  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Buttons  
All buttons in the Call Manager are created equal so that any button can be  
programmed as any other button. The More Buttons companion application also  
be used for ACD functionality. Each Button companion application can be  
assigned one of the 8 global banks, which each have 64 buttons. You can have  
eight instances of the More Buttons companion applications to ensure that you  
have enough buttons in Call Manager. All buttons can be programmed by the  
user for the following:  
Feature Code  
Speed Dial  
System/PBS Commands  
User Defined Actions  
ACD keys  
DSS Extension Key  
Web Key  
Run Program  
For more information, refer to Chapter 4 – Buttons.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Using Companion Applications  
Web Browser  
Call Manager provides an integrated web browser window for access to  
Internet or Intranet locations, or direct access to local HTML files. In addition  
to basic browsing, you can create custom web applications to extend the  
functionality of Call Manager for your business.  
For example, your call center could have incoming calls automatically open  
the Call Manager browser window to a “Caller Survey” page. The Call Survey  
page could display information about the caller and display an answering  
script the agent could use to guide the conversation. The web page might  
also allow the agent to enter answers from the caller into HTML forms and  
submit the results to a company web server.  
The Call Manager Web Window is based on Microsoft Internet Explorer. You  
must have Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher installed on the PC.  
Click the setup icon to set Home URL and the tools to display in the toolbar  
(home, stop, refresh, go back, go forward, URL).  
216  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Web-based User Administration 16  
This chapter familiarizes you with the Web-based Enterprise Manger User  
administration tool. You can manage your communication devices using a web  
browser from even remote locations.  
The user can access the Telephone system to personalize telephone settings,  
retrieve information and remotely activate/deactivate phone features. The  
following are the phone features that can be performed using this application.  
Key/Button programming  
Name change  
DND  
List in directory  
Distinctive Ringing Patterns  
Phone Settings  
Call Forward – Activate/Deactivate call forward  
Speed dial  
One Touch  
Display Dial Code  
Display Advisory Message  
Preferences  
Account Codes  
Note: You may or may not have some of the features listed above. The  
availability of these features depends on your access as defined by your  
System Administrator.  
Prerequisites  
Your System Administrator can assign different User levels.  
Check with your System Administrator your user level (Normal or Super  
User).  
Log in path/URL for the Web.  
Security Code (password) – By default password assigned by your System  
Administrator.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Log In  
1. Start Microsoft Internet Explorer.  
2. Enter the appropriate URL address field (check with your System  
Administrator). The Enterprise Manager screen displays.  
3. Enter the following:  
User Name: Extension Number  
Password: Extension Number (default)  
Note: This screen may also have a Server Name field depending on your  
extension. You must know your Server name if your extension is in  
multiple servers or if your extension number is the same as another  
extension number in a different server. Check with your System  
Administrator for your server name.  
4. Click Submit.  
To change your  
Security Code/  
Password  
1. Select the Preferences tab.  
2. Check “Change Password”.  
3. Enter a password in the New Login Password field confirm it.  
4. Click the Save icon.  
Log Out  
Click on Log Out at the right corner of the screen.  
218  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Home  
Using the Home screen, you can do any of the following functions. The buttons  
that display on this screen is based on the your telephone - 10 button or 20  
buttons.  
Set Distinctive ringing patterns  
Assign new keys or change keys  
Change button labels  
Change the display name  
List your name in the directory  
Turn Do Not Disturb (DND) on or off  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Keystrip Labels  
The Feature Key or Button assignments enable each button on the telephone  
to be addressed and coded to represent a function or feature to be performed.  
The telephone button layout on the screen will look like the telephone  
connected to this extension. Some feature buttons require additional  
parameters to completely define the key (e.g., a Phantom DN needs a  
directory number, ringing assignment, and the tone pitch when ringing  
occurs).  
1. From the Home screen, right click on the key and enter the label.  
2. Click the desired option from the panel that displays.  
Directory No (displays only when logged in as a Super User) – Assign a  
Primary DN key, Secondary/Phantom DN, Phantom DN Message  
Waiting, or DSS key to this Key.  
Features – Assign Automatic Busy Redial (ABR), Automatic Call Back  
(ACB), Do Not Disturb (DND), Short Flash, Long Flash, Privacy, Privacy  
Release, BGM Key, DSS Key, Program, Account Code, Microphone Cut  
Off, and Application Starting are available selections.  
Call Control – Activate Speed Dial, Release Button, Release/Answer,  
Cancel, Source Party, Destination Party, CLID or Night Transfer are  
available selections.  
Call Forward – Set Call Forwarding assignments for this FB. Forward All  
Calls, Forward Busy, Forward No Answer, Forward Busy No Answer,  
Forward Ext/All Call, Forward Ext/Busy, Forward Ext/No Answer and  
Forward Ext/Busy No Answer and PhDN Message Waiting are available  
selections.  
Park Page – Assign Call Park Orbit, All Paging, Group Paging, All  
Emergency Paging, Individual Emergency Paging and Paging Answer  
Feature access are available selections.  
Call Pickup – Assign FB to a Pickup-Group, Pickup-Directed Terminal,  
Pickup-Directed Group, Pickup-Directed DN, Pickup-Any External,  
Pickup-CO Retrieve, Pickup-Local Retrieve, Pickup-Remote, Pickup-  
Directed DN Retrieve and Pickup-On Hold and Incoming.  
Voice Mail – Enable button to Record or Pause/Resume Voice Mail.  
ACD – Assign FB as either Log In/Out, Available/Unavailable, Work Unit,  
ACD Help, ACD PickUp, End WrapUp, Join ACD Call, Monitor ACD Call,  
Start/End Shift, or Display status.  
One Touch – One Touch buttons can be used for storing frequently used  
features or dialed numbers. Assign and Submit a button as a One Touch  
button. Once the One Touch button is created, double click the button to  
enter the programming dialog box.  
Blank – Clear button assignment.  
220  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
DND Activating  
When you activate Do Not Disturb (DND), internal and external calls do not ring  
your telephone. Callers may be blocked and receive DND busy tone when they  
call your telephone; or, calls will call forward busy or no answer depending on how  
many appearances of your extension button are on your telephone. You can  
continue to make calls normally when in the DND mode.  
Your telephone dial tone will sound a stuttered tone when in the DND mode.  
Stuttered dial tone can be turned off from the Basic Settings screen by disabling  
Message Waiting & DND Dial Tone.To activate DND on your Telephone  
1. From the Home menu, click DND under the Phone Key. The DND default is  
Off.  
2. Change the Do Not Disturb button to ON.  
3. Click Save.  
One Touch  
Buttons  
One Touch buttons can be used for storing frequently used features or dialed  
numbers, such as Speed Dial numbers. One-touch buttons can be preassigned to  
your telephone – your System Administrator can help you identify them.  
If you do not have a One Touch button, but you have an available Programmable  
Feature Button, you can convert the Programmable Feature Button to a One  
Touch button. Once you have created a One Touch button, you can change the  
function by using the following procedure.  
Changing a One  
Touch Button  
1. Right click on the pre-programmed One Touch.  
2. Select One Touch. The dialog box below displays.  
3. Enter the digits or special buttons for the function to be dialed. You can  
include the following in the dial string:  
Dial pad digits 0~9.To program special characters, see Table 11 on  
A maximum of 32 characters.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Station and System Speed Dial index numbers can be entered.  
The Speed Dial index number will automatically dial out on the  
extension or Line programmed on the One Touch button with the  
associated Speed Dial index number.  
Function buttons, except One Touch or a Program button.  
Handset hooking (on-hook/off-hook) cannot be recorded.  
4. Enter the key strip label, eg., Engineering Conference, Cell, etc. This  
label will display on your telephone.  
5. Click OK, then the Save icon to save the entry.  
Table 11: Special Characters  
Entry  
Meaning  
Indicates “stop.” The One Touch button blinks rapidly and stops the delivery of  
the remaining digits in the string until it is pressed again. Multiple “stops” can be  
programmed into one string.  
+ Hold  
*
Pause (1~9) seconds. If you need to pause longer than nine seconds, enter  
additional pause escape sequences. For example, to insert a 17-second pause,  
enter *9*8. The display of a pause in the Speed Dial Number shows a “P”  
without specifying the duration. In this example, you would see “PP.”  
*
(1~9)  
**  
*
#
#
*
Example of Special  
Character Usage  
To create a One Touch for Park and Page under one button, program the  
following sequence under the One Touch button.  
CNF #33***HOLD FB1 #30  
CNF – puts the caller on hold and gets new dial tone.  
#33 – code to park call  
** – this special character outputs a single * which will select an available  
orbit and display the selected orbit on the phone.  
HOLD – This special character is a Stop. The dial string pauses and  
*
enables the user to view the selected orbit on the display. The dial string will  
restart from this point when the One Touch button is pressed again.  
FB1 – gets new dial tone on the PDN  
#30 – code for All Call Page which allows the user to page the location of the  
orbited call.  
To Use a One Touch  
Button  
On your telephone, press the labeled One Touch button.  
222  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Ring Tones  
To set distinctive ringing  
1. Left mouse click the key button. The Station key data dialog box displays.  
2. Under Tone Pitch, enter the appropriate levels for External Pitch and Internal  
Pitch. See table below.  
3. Click OK.  
4. Click the Save icon to save settings.  
Table 12: Internal and External Call Ringing Tones  
Tone No.  
01  
Frequency and Cadence  
500 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat  
02  
1300 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat  
500/640 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat  
860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat  
860/1180 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat  
1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 3 sec. Off, repeat  
1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. On, 1 sec. Off, repeat  
860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 3 sec. Off, repeat  
860/1180 Hz 0.5 sec. On, 1300/1780 Hz 1 sec. Off, repeat  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Settings  
You can modify your telephone settings using Settings screen. You can click  
on the different tabs to access different telephone settings.  
1. After you have entered the settings in the parameters.  
2. Click the Save icon.  
Note: Hover over the bubbles located above the parameters to read the  
flyover text for information to be entered in each field.  
224  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Call Forward  
This screen has two parts:  
CF Internal Calls and Line Calls  
CF Direct Line Calls  
CF Internal and  
This Call Forward option allows you to forward internal calls and outside line calls  
that come to your extension to another destination. The destination can be voice  
mail, another telephone extension connected to your telephone system or private  
network; or, an external telephone number connected through the public  
telephone network.  
Line Calls  
Definitions  
1. Line calls are calls that come to your extension through the public telephone  
network lines. If your telephone has a direct line and the “CF Direct Line Calls”  
option is activated, direct line calls to your extension will forward to the “CF  
Direct Line Calls” destination – not to the destination set in this option.  
2. Internal calls are calls that come to your telephone from the Attendant  
Console, other telephones and voice mail devices connected to your  
telephone system or telephone system private network.  
3. Your telephone may call forward even if you do not activate it; this is because  
your system administrator has activated System Call Forward on your  
telephone.  
CF Direct Line  
Calls  
This Call Forward option allows you to forward direct line calls to another  
destination. When you activate this CF option, only line calls to your direct line  
telephone number will forward calls to the destination set in this option. Internal  
calls will not forward to the destination set in this option. The destination can be  
voice mail, another telephone extension connected to your telephone system or  
private network; or, an external telephone number connected through the public  
telephone network.  
Definitions  
1. Direct Line calls are calls that ring your extension when outside callers dial  
your direct line telephone number. They do not include internal calls from  
telephones that dial your extension number or outside line calls that ring  
multiple telephones on your telephone system.  
2. When this option is activated, direct line calls forward to this destination and  
ignore the destination set in the “CF Internal and Line Calls” option.  
3. Internal calls are calls that come to your telephone from the Attendant  
Console, other telephones and voice mail devices connected to your  
telephone system or telephone system Private Network.  
4. Your telephone may call forward even if you do not activate it; this is because  
your system administrator has activated System Call Forward on your  
telephone.  
This feature enables you to assign Call Forward (CF) destinations for each  
extension on your telephone that will override the telephone’s System CF settings.  
To set up Station  
Call Forward  
1. Select Call Forward tab.The Call Forward screen displays.  
2. Enter the appropriate fields.  
Note: Hover over the bubbles located above the parameters to read the flyover  
text for information to be entered in each field.  
3. Click the Save button.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Table 13: Call Forward Internal Calls and Line Calls, CF Direct Line Calls  
FIELD  
DESCRIPTION  
CF All Calls to  
CF Busy to  
Call Forward Destination.  
The call forward destination is the telephone number that should be called  
when your telephone call forwards.  
The call forward destination can be:  
CF No Answer to  
CF Busy or No Answer to  
1. Any extension number connected to your telephone system or telephone  
system private network.  
2. The extension number of the Voice Mail device on your telephone system or  
telephone system private network.  
3. Any external telephone number that you are allowed to dial from your  
telephone. When you forward calls to an external telephone number you must  
enter the outgoing line access code in the destination.Your telephone LCD will  
display EXTERNAL CALL FORWARD when set CF to an external telephone  
number.  
Example: If you want to forward calls to external number 5833700 and if you  
dial 9 to access an outside line, enter: 95833700 as the destination when you  
set CF to an external telephone number. If the number is a long distance  
number, you must enter 1+ Area Code before the other digits.  
NA Timer (CF No Answer  
to)  
This timer determines how long your telephone will ring before it forwards to  
the CF No Answer destination. The timer value is in seconds.  
NA Timer (CF Busy or No  
Answer to)  
If you telephone is not busy, this timer determines how long your telephone will  
ring before it forwards to the CF Busy/No Answer destination. The timer value  
is in seconds.  
Table 14: Call Forward Direct Line Calls  
FIELD  
DESCRIPTION  
CF Internal – CF All Calls to When Call Forward All Calls is activated on your telephone, your telephone  
will not ring; all internal calls and incoming line calls will be sent directly to the  
CF All Calls destination.  
Note: If Direct Line Call Forward is activated on your telephone, calls to your  
direct line telephone number will not forward to this destination; they will  
forward to the direct line CF destination - if activated.  
CF Internal – CF Busy to  
When Call Forward Busy is activated and your telephone is busy on an  
existing call, new internal calls and incoming line calls will not ring your  
telephone; all new calls will be sent directly to the CF Busy destination.  
Note: If Direct Line Call Forward is activated on your telephone, calls to your  
direct line telephone number will not forward to this destination; they will  
forward to the direct line CF destination - if activated.  
CF Internal – CF No Answer When Call Forward No Answer is activated on your telephone and your  
telephone receives internal calls and incoming line calls, your telephone will  
ring; if the call is not answered within a predetermined amount of time, the call  
will be sent to the CF No Answer destination. The amount of time your  
telephone will ring before it forwards is the amount of time set in the Ring No  
Answer timer.  
to  
Note: If Direct Line Call Forward is activated on you telephone, calls to your  
direct line telephone number will not forward to this destination; they will  
forward to the direct line CF destination - if activated.  
226  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Table 14: Call Forward Direct Line Calls (continued)  
FIELD  
DESCRIPTION  
CF Internal – CF Busy or No When Call Forward Busy or No Answer is activated on your telephone and  
your telephone receives an internal call or incoming line call the following call  
forward operation occurs:  
Answer to  
If your telephone is busy on an existing call, new internal calls and incoming  
line calls will not ring your telephone; all new calls will be sent directly to the  
CF Busy or No Answer destination.  
If your telephone is idle, your telephone will ring; if the call is not answered  
within a predetermined amount of time, the call will be sent to the CF Busy or  
No Answer destination. The amount of time your telephone will ring before it  
forwards is the amount of time set in the Ring No Answer timer.  
Note: If Direct Line Call Forward is activated on you telephone, calls to your  
direct line telephone number will not forward to this destination; they will  
forward to the direct line CF destination - if activated.  
CF Direct Line Calls – CF  
All Calls to  
When Direct Line, CF All Calls is activated on your telephone, and you receive  
a call on your direct line telephone number, your telephone will not ring; the  
call will be sent directly to the CF All Calls destination.  
Notes:  
1. Internal calls will not forward to the direct line destination. Internal calls only  
forward to the “Internal Call and Line Call” destinations.  
2. Your telephone may forward even if you do not activate Call Forward; this is  
because your system administrator has activated System Call Forward on  
your telephone.  
CF Direct Line Calls – CF  
Busy to  
When Direct line CF Busy is activated and your telephone is busy on an  
existing call, new calls to your direct line telephone number will not ring your  
telephone; direct line calls will be sent directly to the CF Busy destination.  
Notes:  
1. Internal calls will not forward to the direct line destination. Internal calls only  
forward to the “Internal Call and Line Call” destinations.  
2. Your telephone may forward even if you do not activate Call Forward; this is  
because your system administrator has activated System Call Forward on  
your telephone.  
CF Direct Line Calls – CF  
No Answer to  
When Direct Call CF No Answer is activated on your telephone and your  
telephone receives a call to your direct line telephone number, your telephone  
will ring; if the direct line call is not answered within a predetermined amount of  
time, the call will be sent to the CF No Answer destination. The amount of time  
your telephone will ring before it forwards is the amount of time set in the Ring  
No Answer timer.  
Notes:  
1. Internal calls will not forward to the direct line destination. Internal calls only  
forward to the “Internal Call and Line Call” destinations.  
2. Your telephone may forward even if you do not activate Call Forward; this is  
because your system administrator has activated System Call Forward on  
your telephone.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Table 14: Call Forward Direct Line Calls (continued)  
FIELD  
DESCRIPTION  
CF Direct Line Calls – CF  
Busy or No Answer to  
When Call Forward Busy or No Answer is activated on your telephone and  
your telephone receives an internal call or incoming line call the following call  
forward operation occurs:  
If your telephone is busy on an existing call, new calls to your direct line  
telephone number will not ring your telephone; all new direct line calls will be  
sent directly to the CF Busy or No Answer destination.  
If your telephone is idle, your telephone will ring; if the direct line call is not  
answered within a predetermined amount of time, the call will be sent to the  
CF Busy or No Answer destination. The amount of time your telephone will  
ring before it forwards is the amount of time set in the Ring No Answer timer.  
Notes:  
1. Internal calls will not forward to the direct line destination. Internal calls only  
forward to the “Internal Call and Line Call” destinations.  
2. Your telephone may forward even if you do not activate Call Forward; this is  
because your system administrator has activated System Call Forward on  
your telephone.  
Speed Dial  
Your telephone must have Station Speed Dial numbers enabled by your  
System Administrator to provide the Station Speed Dial feature. You can have  
a maximum of 100 Station Speed Dial Numbers (up to 32 digits each)  
assigned to each station. Only the Speed Dial numbers that are assigned to  
you by your System Administrator appear on this screen.  
1. Select Speed Dial tab.The Station Speed Dial screen displays.  
2. Select the row/number to program.  
Note: Hover over the bubbles located above the parameters to read the  
flyover text for information to be entered in each field.  
3. Click the Save button.  
System Speed Dial  
All telephones in your system can share a list of up to 800 System Speed Dial  
numbers under the exclusive control of the System Administrator. In some  
cases, System Speed Dial enables you to reach numbers that you would not  
be allowed to dial directly from your telephone. System speed dial is a view  
only screen.  
System Info  
This is a view only screen.  
Display Advisory  
Messages  
Advisory messaging enables you to store an informative message for LCD  
telephones that call your telephone. This is view only under System Info.  
228  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Voice Mail  
You can modify your Voice Mail settings using this screen.  
1. Make the appropriate changes.  
2. Click the Save button.  
Using this menu, you can make changes to the following:  
Change the Message Waiting light for the mailbox.  
Time zones in which the user normally uses the mailbox.  
Change your voice mail password.  
Click on the Question bubble for Help information relating to the different  
parameters.  
Call Screening  
Follow Me  
Set up the mailbox to make wake-up calls  
Account Code  
Account Codes can be used for a variety of reasons including billing, tracking,  
and line restriction applications. Account Codes are assigned in the system as  
a fixed length (default is six digits) and are recorded by the system, along with  
the details of the calls, which can be printed on a Station Message Detail  
Recording (SMDR) report.  
The list of accounting codes that can be verified is limited to 800. Each code  
entered may be flagged whether it is to be used for verification prior to the call  
be placed or whether it is used for changing the restriction level for that call or  
both.  
Table 15  
FIELD  
Account Code Data  
DESCRIPTION  
Account Code  
Enter the code to be used as a valid accounting code that the user will be  
expected to dial. The Registered Digit Length (FB02) must be greater than or  
equal to the Verified Digit Length (FB01).  
Possible values: 4~15 (default = 6)  
DRL  
This option allows a station user change the DRL assigned to the station (in  
Prg.200/260 etc.) by dialing an account code. The DRL of the an account code  
will be applied to a call when this Verified Account Code is entered.  
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)  
Notes:  
If 0 is set, the DRL of the station will not change when the station dials the  
account code - in this case the DRL set for the station in Prg 200/260 etc. will be  
applied to the call even if the station dials the account code.  
1f 1~16 is set, the DRL of the station will change to the DRL selected here when  
the station dials the account code - in this case the DRL set for the station in Prg  
200/260 etc.will be overridden to the call.  
IPedge UG 06/11  
TOSHIBA  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPedge  
Web-based User Administration  
Table 15  
Account Code Data  
FIELD  
FRL  
DESCRIPTION  
This option allows a station user change the FRL assigned to the station (in  
Prg.200/260 etc.) by dialing an account code. The FRL of the an account code  
will be applied to a call when this Verified Account Code is entered.  
Possible values: 0~16 (default = 0)  
Notes:  
If 0 is set, the FRL of the station will not change when the station dials the  
account code - in this case the FRL set for the station in Prg 200/260 etc. will be  
applied to the call even if the station dials the account code.  
1f 1~16 is set, the FRL of the station will change to the FRL selected here when  
the station dials the account code - in this case the FRL set for the station in Prg  
200/260 etc. will be overridden to the call.  
Network COS  
This Network COS will be applied to a call when this Verified Account Code is  
entered.  
Possible values: 0~32 (default = 0)  
Preferences  
Using this screen you perform the following functions:  
Select the Phone display language  
MPM display language  
MPM Color scheme  
Email address to be displayed  
Enter the Remote Call Forward / DND password  
Change your Enterprise Manager User access password  
230  
TOSHIBA  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
A ~ C  
Index  
fixed, 13, 30  
flexible, 30  
Hold, 15  
navigation, 15  
one touch, 221  
programmable, 90  
Redial, 15  
A
account code, 134  
account codes, 37  
forced, 37  
verified/non-verified, 37  
account number, 136  
ACD, 220  
ACD call ringing, 158  
ACD key view, 104  
ACD Keys, 130  
ACT, 85  
shift, 15  
speed dial, 15  
user programmable, 92  
buttons mode, 92  
action keys, 129  
action variables, 148  
actions  
C
calendar, 107  
Call  
creating actions, 133  
importing, 151  
testing, 152  
info, 89  
Window, 89  
call  
advisory message default code table, 39  
all call page, 57  
always on top, 104  
answer, 129  
answer a call, 25  
answering calls, 23  
attendant, 220  
answered, 156  
control, 129  
disconnect, 156  
extra call info, 100  
forward, 87  
history, 104  
logging, 104  
modify, 136  
results, 109  
automatic  
hold, 26  
line selection, 22  
automatic hold, 26  
retrieve, 97  
ringing, 155, 158  
transfer, 147  
types, 105  
B
browser, 16  
busy override, 55  
buttons  
variables, 148  
call center, 101  
call control, 220  
call forward, 220  
any call, 42  
3200-series LCD, 30  
ACD, 90  
close, 92  
Cnf/Trn, 15  
debug files, 116  
dial pad, 88  
dock, 92  
direct line calls, 225  
internal and line calls, 225  
station, 41  
call fowarding, 98  
IPedge UG 06/11  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
D ~ K  
call handler mode, 92  
call handler rules, 92, 166  
add or change, 154  
creating, 154  
delete, 154  
do not disturb  
override, 55  
Do-Not-Disturb, 87  
door lock, 220  
drag and drop, 96, 131  
drop, 50  
call hold, 26  
call info  
DSS, 51  
DSS message, 165  
export, 134  
call pickup, 46, 220  
call waiting, 56  
calling, 23  
calling from SoftIPT, 34, 35  
calls  
answering, 96  
hold, 97  
outgoing, 95  
transferring, 97  
chat, 186  
E
emergency  
page, 57  
enable sound, 105  
exclusive hold, 26  
executive override, 56  
exporting actions, 151  
extra info, 105  
feature, 106  
class of service  
override, 56  
Cnf/Trn, 15  
F
feature code, 127  
CO line, 220  
call transfer, 47  
color  
features, 220  
field name, 137  
flexible buttons, 30  
forced account codes (verified/non-verified), 37  
forwarding, 145  
back, 127  
default, 127  
text, 127  
G
companion application windows, 93  
conference, 129  
hold, 26  
Goldmine, 85  
group pickup, 46  
split/join/drop, 50  
voice mail, 49  
contact  
H
handset calling, 23  
handsfree answerback, 25  
hangup, 129  
add, 107  
D
Hold, 15  
hold, 26, 129  
line hold, 45, 47  
home area code, 107, 108, 111  
outside, 112  
DDE message, 141  
dial, 129  
area code, 111  
dial buffer, 88  
dial directory, 23  
dial pad, 88  
dialer, 109  
dialing  
hot key, 96, 117  
on-screen, 95  
dialpad, 95  
direct station selection  
buttons, 51  
hot dialing, 22, 23  
I
importing actions, 151  
indicators  
LED, 28  
initialize key, 126  
Insight, 134  
J
directory  
extension, 168  
speed dial, 169  
directory number, 220  
distinctive ringing, 223  
join, 50  
K
key  
232  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
L ~ P  
ACD, 130  
action, 129  
change, 126  
mobile user, 104  
Msg button/LED, 27  
mute, 14, 26  
copy, 126  
N
DSS extension, 130  
feature code, 127  
initialize, 126  
label, 127  
PBX command, 128  
run program, 131  
speed dial, 127  
swap, 126  
name, 136  
names  
storing speed dial, 61  
navigation key, 15  
Net Phone  
expanded view, 89  
main menu, 90  
main screen, 86  
shutdown, 157  
startup, 157  
system, 128  
web, 131  
keys  
combination, 144  
creating keys, 131  
special, 143  
streamlined view, 86  
O
keystrokes, 142  
OAISYS  
auto call record, 88  
Tracer, 88  
On manual dialing, 107  
one touch, 220  
one touch button, 221, 222  
options, 116  
L
language code, 52  
LCD  
3200-series buttons, 30  
LCD display, 87  
LED indicators, 28  
line  
automatic selection, 22  
ringing preference, 22  
line button, 47  
outlook  
calendar, 160, 165  
dialing, 163  
incoming calls, 163  
lookup, 135  
local dialing plan, 108, 110  
log string, 135  
logging in or out, 101, 177  
lookup, 135  
outlook integration, 106  
outside numbers, 109  
override  
busy, 55  
low profile, 104  
class of service, 56  
do not disturb, 55  
executive, 56  
M
making a call, 23  
privacy, 56  
menu  
override calls, 55  
advanced, 116  
P
message waiting, 105  
message waiting light  
on another telephone, 27, 53  
on phantom ext/MW, 27, 53  
Mic button, 14, 26, 55  
microphone, 14, 23, 26, 54, 55  
microphone cut-off, 54, 61  
Microsoft, 85  
paging, 46  
park  
park in orbit, 45  
park in orbit, 45  
park page, 220  
PCH rules, 166  
phone forwarding, 145  
phone number, 136  
test, 112  
Outlook, 85  
Windows ’98, 85  
Windows 2000, 85  
Windows NT 4.0, 85  
Windows Vista, 85  
Windows XP, 85  
phone screen, 136  
pick up group calls, 46  
pickup, 46  
pop up, 104  
IPedge UG 06/11  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
R ~ W  
popup, 117  
preferences  
swap keys, 126  
system variables, 150  
user, 104  
presence, 169  
privacy  
T
tabs  
override, 56  
programmable keys, 126  
advanced, 114  
dialing, 108  
docking, 113  
general, 104  
R
ready to dial, 109  
re-dial, 95  
TAPI service provider, 115  
TASKE Contact, 134  
testing actions, 152  
tone signaling, 22  
transfer, 129, 147  
trunk access code, 108  
two (tandem) CO line connection, 49  
redial, 15, 88  
ringing  
distinctive settings, 223  
line preference, 22  
ringing line preference, 25  
run program, 131  
U
S
screen  
uniform call distribution (UCD), 62  
URL, 137, 138  
phone, 136  
user defined action Keys, 129  
user Preferences, 104  
popup call info, 139  
security code, 218  
shift key, 15  
shortcut keys, 117  
side window  
V
value, 137  
variables, 148  
rollout, 92  
screen, 92  
system, 150  
views  
signaling  
screen docked, 90  
voice first signaling, 22  
voice mail, 220  
conference, 49  
tone, 22  
voice first, 22  
soft keys  
2000-phone location, 30  
SoftIPT  
volume control, 28  
volume controls, 89  
voluntary account codes (verified/non-  
verified), 37  
calling, 34, 35  
directory, 35  
sound file, 105  
speakerphone, 26  
special characters for speed dialing, 60  
speed dial, 15, 221  
access codes, 59, 60  
directory, 169  
keys, 127  
W
WAV file, 137  
web access, 15  
web browser, 137, 138  
web keys, 131  
list, 96  
names, 61  
Spkr button, 23  
answering, 25  
split, 50  
standard info, 136  
static information fields, 105  
status, 159  
agent, 102, 177  
status message, 144  
storing speed dial names, 61  
234  
IPedge UG 06/11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Technics Portable CD Player SL XP140 User Manual
Toastmaster Convection Oven TG50PC User Manual
Toshiba Car Satellite Radio System i User Manual
Triarch Indoor Furnishings 60166 User Manual
Tripp Lite Network Cables P582 006 User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone ANA9320 User Manual
Uniden Two Way Radio UH047sx User Manual
Viper Carpet Cleaner VE 13 P User Manual
Vivitar Camera Lens V 800MR User Manual
Wagan Power Supply 300300300 User Manual